Sanyo Cell Phone SCP 7400 User Guide
User’s Guide  
SanyoSCP-7400  
www.qwestwireless.com  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making International Calls With Plus Code Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30  
Dialing From the Contacts Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30  
Using Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31  
Using Abbreviated Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31  
Entering Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32  
Selecting a Character Input Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32  
Entering Characters Using T9 Text Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33  
Entering Characters by Tapping the Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34  
EnteringSymbols, Numbers, PresetSuffixes, Smileys, andEmoticons .35  
2B. ControllingYour Phone’s Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37  
Sound Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38  
Ringer Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38  
Selecting a Tone Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40  
Setting a Start-up/Power-off Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40  
Using Voice Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40  
Setting Up Key Press Echo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41  
Adjusting the Phone’s Volume Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41  
Alert Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43  
Silence All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44  
Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45  
Changing the Text Greeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45  
Changing the Backlight Time Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46  
Changing the Display Screen Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47  
Changing the Display for Incoming Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47  
Changing the Display for Area Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48  
Changing the Display for Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49  
Changing the Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50  
Changing the Phone’s Menu Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50  
Changing the Display for My Buddy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51  
Changing the Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51  
Changing the Font Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52  
Location Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53  
Airplane Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54  
TTY Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55  
Phone Setup Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56  
Auto Answer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57  
Setting the Open/Close Flip Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
Setting Any Key Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59  
Setting the Side Key Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59  
Setting Abbreviated Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60  
Setting the Meeting Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61  
Headset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
Setting Return to Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63  
Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63  
Setting Message Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
Editing Preset Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
Setting a Callback Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65  
Setting Your Signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65  
Display Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66  
Using the Mini-Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66  
2C. SettingYour Phone’s Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67  
Accessing the Security Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68  
Using Your Phone’s Lock Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68  
Locking Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68  
Unlocking Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69  
Locking the Picture and Video Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69  
Locking Voice Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69  
Locking Ready Link Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70  
Changing the Lock Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70  
Calling in Lock Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70  
Restricting Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71  
Using Special Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72  
Erasing the Contacts Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73  
Erasing All Voice Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73  
Erasing All Downloads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73  
Resetting Your Pictures Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74  
Resetting Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74  
SM  
Security Features for Sprint PCS Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75  
Enabling and Disabling Sprint PCS Vision Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2D. ControllingYour Roaming Experience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76  
Understanding Roaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77  
Setting Your Phone’s Roam Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79  
Using Call Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80  
2E. NavigatingThrough Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82  
Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82  
Viewing the Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83  
2F. Managing Call History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86  
Viewing History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87  
Call History Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88  
Making a Call From Call History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88  
Saving a Phone Number From Call History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89  
Prepending a Phone Number From Call History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90  
Erasing Call History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90  
2G. Using the Contacts Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91  
Displaying the Contacts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92  
Adding a New Contacts Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92  
Finding Contacts List Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93  
Contacts List Entry Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94  
Adding a Phone Number to a Contacts Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95  
Editing a Contacts Entry’s Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95  
Erasing a Contacts Entry From the List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95  
Assigning Speed Dial Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96  
Editing a Contacts Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
Selecting a Ringer and Image Type for an Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98  
Secret Contacts Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99  
2H. Personal Organizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100  
Managing the Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101  
Displaying Your Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101  
Setting Holidays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101  
Using Your Phone’s Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102  
Adding an Event to the Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102  
Event Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103  
Event Alert Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Call Alarm Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104  
Adding a Call Alarm to the Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104  
Call Alarm Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105  
Call Alarm Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105  
Editing an Event or Call Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106  
Viewing a Future or Past Day’s Scheduled Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106  
Erasing a Day’s Events or Call Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106  
Using the To Do List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107  
Adding To Do List Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107  
Viewing the To Do List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107  
Editing To Do List Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107  
Adding a To Do List Item to the Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108  
Deleting Items From the To Do List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108  
Viewing Memory in Your Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109  
Purging All Events, Call Alarms, or To Do List Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109  
Personal Information Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110  
Displaying Your User Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110  
Finding Icon Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110  
Displaying the Version Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110  
Displaying Advanced Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
Using Your Phone’s Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
Using the Alarm Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
Using the Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113  
Using the World Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113  
Downloading Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114  
Confirming the Downloaded Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117  
Downloaded Data Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118  
Erasing the Downloaded Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121  
2I. UsingYour Phone’sVoice Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122  
Using Automatic Speech Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123  
Activating Automatic Speech Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123  
Making a Voice Call by Using ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124  
Finding Contacts List Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125  
Making a Call Using a Voice Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126  
Programming a Voice Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reviewing Voice Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127  
Erasing a Voice Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127  
Making a Ready Link Call by Using ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128  
Using Digit Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129  
Phone Status Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130  
ASR Help Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130  
Managing Voice Memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131  
Recording Voice Memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131  
Reviewing Voice Memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132  
Erasing Voice Memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133  
Setting Up Screen Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134  
Activating Screen Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134  
Selecting an Announcement for Screen Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135  
Recording Your Name for a Pre-Recorded Announcement . . . . . . .135  
Recording a Customized Announcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136  
Reviewing an Announcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136  
Erasing an Announcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136  
2J. Using Ready Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137  
Getting Started With Ready Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138  
Setting Ready Link Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138  
Preparing Your Phone for Ready Link Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138  
Ready Link Call Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139  
Making and Receiving a Ready Link Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140  
Displaying the Ready Link List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140  
Selecting a Contacts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140  
Making a Ready Link Call (1-to-1 Call) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141  
Making a Ready Link Call (Group Call) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142  
Making a Ready Link Call by Entering a Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143  
Missed Call Notification for Ready Link Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144  
Receiving a Ready Link Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145  
Ready Link Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146  
Adding and Editing Ready Link Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146  
Copying an Entry to Personal List or Personal Group List . . . . . . . .146  
Saving a Ready Link Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147  
Finding an Entry in the Ready Link List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding a New Contact to Your Personal List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148  
Adding a New Group to Your Personal Group List . . . . . . . . . . . . .149  
Editing a Contact in Your Personal List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150  
Editing a Group in Your Personal Group List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151  
Erasing Ready Link List Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152  
Erasing an Entry in Your Personal List or Personal Group List . . . . .152  
Erasing a Ready Link List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153  
Updating Your Ready Link Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153  
Updating the Personal Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153  
Managing Ready Link Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154  
Assigning Speed Dialing for Ready Link Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154  
Restarting the Ready Link Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154  
Setting Ready Link Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155  
Setting Ringer Types for Ready Link Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155  
Setting an Alert Notification for Ready Link Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156  
Setting the Speakerphone for Ready Link Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156  
Setting the Default View of the Ready Link List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157  
Setting the Floor Display of the Ready Link Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157  
2K. UsingYour Phone’s Built-in Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158  
Taking Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159  
SM  
Creating Your Sprint PCS Picture Mail Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160  
Camera Mode Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161  
Selecting Camera Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165  
Viewing Your Camera’s Status Area Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166  
Storing Pictures in My Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168  
In Camera Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168  
In Camera Folder Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168  
Saved to Phone Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171  
Saved to Phone Folder Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172  
Taking Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173  
Video Mode Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174  
Selecting Camcorder Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176  
Viewing Your Video’s Status Area Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177  
Storing Videos in My Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178  
In Camcorder Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Camcorder Folder Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179  
Saved to Phone Folder (Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181  
Saved to Phone Folder Options (Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182  
Sending Sprint PCS Picture Mail and Sprint PCS Video Mail . . . . . . . .183  
Sending Pictures From the In Camera Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183  
Sending Videos From the In Camcorder Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185  
Sending Sprint PCS Picture Mail From Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185  
Sending to Various Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187  
Managing Sprint PCS Picture Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188  
Using the Sprint PCS Picture Mail Website . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188  
Managing Online Pictures From Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189  
Uploading Your Pictures and Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190  
Downloading Your Online Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191  
Sending Online Sprint PCS Picture Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192  
Accessing Online Picture Options From Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . .193  
2L. UsingYour Phone’s Built-in Media Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196  
Your Multimedia Channel Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197  
Accessing Your Media Player’s Channel Listings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198  
Playing a Video or Audio Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199  
Multimedia Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201  
Multimedia FAQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202  
®
Section 3:Qwest Service Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205  
®
3A. Qwest Service Features:The Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206  
Using Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207  
Setting Up Your Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207  
Voicemail Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207  
New Voicemail Message Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208  
Retrieving Your Voicemail Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208  
Voicemail Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210  
Clearing the Message Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212  
Displaying Your Voicemail Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212  
Voicemail Menu Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213  
Using Caller ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214  
Responding to Call Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making a Three-Way Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215  
Using Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216  
SM  
3B. Sprint PCSVision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217  
Getting Started With Sprint PCS Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218  
Your User Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218  
Launching a Sprint PCS Vision Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219  
Net Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220  
Sprint PCS Vision Connection Status and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . .220  
Navigating the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221  
Using the Sprint PCS Vision Multimedia Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223  
Purchasing Multimedia Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223  
Playing an Audio or Video Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224  
Understanding Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225  
Message Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225  
New Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225  
Message Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226  
Displaying Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226  
Sending a Text Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227  
Sending a Message in the Drafts Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228  
Sending a Message in the Outbox Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229  
Message Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229  
Changing the Display Font Size of a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232  
Prepending a Phone Number From a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232  
Message Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233  
Moving a Message Into Another Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234  
Erasing Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234  
Erasing a Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235  
Accessing Email Providers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235  
Using Email Providers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235  
Using Instant Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236  
Accessing Instant Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236  
Experiencing Wireless Online Chat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237  
Downloading Premium Services Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238  
Accessing Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240  
Accessing Ringers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessing Screen Savers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244  
Exploring the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246  
Using the Browser Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247  
Sprint PCS Vision FAQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251  
Section 4:Safety Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252  
4A. Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253  
Getting the Most Out of Your Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254  
Maintaining Safe Use of and Access to Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255  
Caring for the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257  
Acknowledging Special Precautions and the FCC Notice . . . . . . . . . .258  
Consumer Information on Wireless Phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260  
Owner’s Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275  
User’s Guide Proprietary Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275  
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
®
Welcome to Qwest  
This guide will familiarize you with our technology and your new  
wireless phone through simple, easy-to-follow instructions. If you  
have already reviewed the StartHeretoActivate guide that was  
packaged with your new phone, then you’re ready to explore the  
advanced features outlined in this guide.  
If you have not read your StartHeretoActivate guide, go to  
Section One – Getting Started. This section provides all the  
information you need to unlock your phone, set up your voicemail,  
and use services such as directory assistance and operator  
services.  
®
Welcome and thank you for choosing Qwest .  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
This User’sGuide introduces you to wireless service and all the  
features of your new phone. It’s divided into four sections:  
ࡗ
 Section1: Getting Started  
ࡗ
 Section2: Your Phone  
ࡗ
 Section3: Qwest Service Features  
ࡗ
 Section4: Safety Guidelines  
Throughout this guide, you’ll find tips that highlight special  
shortcuts and timely reminders to help you make the most of your  
new phone and service. The Table of Contents and Index will also  
help you quickly locate specific information.  
You’ll get the most out of your phone if you read each section.  
However, if you’d like to get right to a specific feature, simply locate  
that section in the Table of Contents and click on the page number  
to go directly to that page. Follow the instructions in that section,  
and you’ll be ready to use your phone in no time.  
Note: You can view this guide online or print it to keep it on hand. If you’re viewing  
it online, simply click on a topic in the Table of Contents or Index or on any page  
reference. The PDF will automatically display the appropriate page.  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 1  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 1A  
Setting Up Service  
In This Section  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
GettingStarted  
SettingUpYourVoicemail  
AccountPasswords  
GettingHelp  
SettingupserviceonyourSanyoSCP-7400isquickandeasy.  
This section walks you through the necessary steps to unlock your  
phone, set up your voicemail, and contact Qwest for assistance  
with your service.  
Section 1A: Setting Up Service  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
UnlockingYourPhone  
Tounlockyourphone,followtheseeasysteps:  
1. Press  
to turn the phone on.  
2. Press Unlock (left softkey).  
Note: To select a softkey, press the softkey button directly below the softkey text  
that appears at the bottom left and bottom right of your phone’s display screen.  
Softkey actions change according to the screen you’re viewing and will not  
appear if there is no corresponding action available.  
3. Enter your four-digit lock code. (For security purposes, the  
code is not visible as you type.)  
Tip: If you can’t recall your lock code, try using the last four digits of either your  
Social Security number or phone number or try 0000. If none of these work, call  
TM  
Qwest Wireless Repair at 1-877-879-0611.  
Section 1A: Setting Up Service  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up YourVoicemail  
All unanswered calls to your wireless phone are automatically  
transferred to your voicemail, even if your phone is in use or turned  
off. Therefore, you will want to set up your voicemail and personal  
greeting as soon as your phone is activated.  
Tosetupyourvoicemail:  
1. Press and hold  
.
2. Follow the system prompts to:  
Ⅲ
Create your passcode  
Ⅲ
Record your greeting  
Ⅲ
Record your name announcement  
Ⅲ
Choose whether or not to activate One-Touch Message  
Access (a feature that lets you access messages simply by  
pressing and holding  
enter your passcode)  
, bypassing the need for you to  
Note: The voicemail setup process may vary in certain Affiliate areas.  
For more information about using your voicemail, see  
“Using Voicemail” on page 207.  
Section 1A: Setting Up Service  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Account Passwords  
As a Qwest customer, you enjoy unlimited access to your personal  
account information, your voicemail account, and your Sprint PCS  
Vision account. To ensure that no one else has access to your  
information, you will need to create passwords to protect your  
privacy.  
AccountPassword  
If you are the account owner, you’ll have an account password to sign  
on to www.qwestwireless.com and to use when calling Qwest Wireless  
Customer Service. Your default account password is the last four  
digits of your Social Security number.  
VoicemailPassword  
You’ll create your voicemail password (or passcode) when you set up  
your voicemail. See “Setting Up Your Voicemail” on page 4 for more  
information on your voicemail password.  
SprintPCSVisionPassword  
SM  
If your service plan includes Sprint PCS Vision , you can set up a  
Sprint PCS Vision Password. This optional password may be used to  
authorize purchase of Premium Services content and to protect  
personal information on multi-phone accounts.  
For more information or to change your passwords, sign on  
TM  
to www.qwestwireless.com or call Qwest Wireless Repair at  
1-877-879-0611.  
Section 1A: Setting Up Service  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Help  
VisitOurWebsite  
You can get up-to-date information on your wireless service and  
options by signing onto our Website at www.qwestwireless.com.  
When you visit us online, you can  
ⅷ
Review coverage maps  
ⅷ
Learn how to use voicemail  
ⅷ
Access your account information  
ⅷ
Check out frequently asked questions  
ⅷ
And more  
ReachingQwestWirelessCustomerService  
You can reach Qwest online or by phone:  
ⅷ
Sign on to your account at www.qwestwireless.com  
ⅷ
Call us toll-free at 1-877-879-0611  
DirectoryAssistance  
You have access to a variety of services and information through  
Directory Assistance, including residential, business, and  
government listings. There is a per-call charge and you will be billed  
for airtime.  
TocallDirectoryAssistance:  
ᮣ
Press  
.
OperatorServices  
Operator Services provides assistance when placing collect calls or  
when placing calls billed to a local telephone calling card or third  
party.  
ToaccessOperatorServices:  
ᮣ
Press  
.
For more information or to see the latest in products and services,  
visit us online at www.qwestwireless.com.  
Note: Operator Services may not be available in all Affiliate areas.  
Section 1A: Setting Up Service  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 2  
Your Phone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 2A  
Your Phone: The Basics  
In This Section  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
FrontViewofYourPhone  
ViewingtheDisplayScreen  
FeaturesofYourWirelessPhone  
TurningYour PhoneOnandOff  
UsingYourPhone’sBatteryandCharger  
DisplayingYourPhoneNumber  
MakingandAnsweringCalls  
EnteringText  
YourSanyoSCP-7400Phoneispackedwithfeaturesthatsimplifyyour  
lifeandexpandyourabilitytostayconnectedtothepeopleand  
informationthatareimportanttoyou. This section will guide you  
through the basic functions and calling features of your new  
phone.  
Section 2A: Your Phone – The Basics  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FrontView ofYour Phone  
1. Earpiece  
Q w e s t  
F e b 1 4 , 0 5 ( M o n )  
1 2 : 3 0 p m  
2. Main LCD  
R-Link  
Web  
3. Softkey (left)  
17. Softkey (right)  
16. Side Voice/Call Key  
15. BACK  
4. Navigation Key  
5. MENU/OK  
6. Camera Key  
7. TALK  
14. Side Camera Key  
13. END/POWER  
12. SPEAKER Key  
8. Microphone  
11. Keypad  
9. Accessories Connector  
10. Charger Jack  
18. Faceplate Release  
Latch  
24. Antenna  
25. Headset  
Jack  
19. Camera  
Lens  
20. Flash  
26. Ready Link  
/
Memo Button  
21. LED  
Indicator  
27. Side Volume  
Q w e s t  
1 2 : 3 0 p F e b 1 4  
Key  
22. Speaker  
23. Sub LCD  
Section 2A: Your Phone – The Basics  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Key Features  
1. Earpiece: Lets you hear the caller’s voice.  
2. MainLCD(display): Displays the phone’s main menu, features,  
modes, etc.  
3. Softkey(left): Lets you select the menu corresponding to the  
bottom left line on the Main LCD.  
4. NavigationKey: Lets you navigate quickly and easily through the  
menu options. You can access the menu shortcuts by pressing  
Right: Contacts, Left: Shortcut, Up: Messaging, and  
Down: Downloads.  
5. MENU/OK: Lets you access the phone’s menus and select menu  
options.  
6. CameraKey: Lets you access the Picture & Video menu and take  
pictures and videos.  
7. TALK: Lets you place or receive calls, answer Call Waiting, or use  
Three-Way Calling and Automatic Speech Recognition.  
8. Microphone: Allows the other caller to hear you when you speak  
to them and allows you to record voice memos.  
9. AccessoriesConnector: Connects optional accessories, such as a  
USB cable.  
10. ChargerJack: Connects the travel charger (included).  
11. Keypad: Lets you enter numbers, letters, and characters, and  
navigate within menus. Press and hold keys 2-9 for speed dialing.  
12. SPEAKERKey: Lets you place or receive calls in speakerphone  
mode. You can also use it to activate Automatic Speech  
Recognition.  
13. END/POWER: Lets you turn the phone on and off, end a call, or  
return to standby mode.  
14. SideCameraKey: Lets you access the Picture & Video menu and  
take pictures and videos.  
15. BACK: Lets you display the previous page or clear characters  
from the screen.  
Section 2A: Your Phone – The Basics  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16. SideVoice/CallKey: Lets you place calls by using Automatic  
Speech Recognition.  
17. Softkey(right): Lets you select the menu corresponding to the  
bottom right line on the Main LCD.  
18. FaceplateReleaseLatch: Lets you remove the faceplate.  
19. CameraLens: The built-in camera lens lets you take pictures and  
videos.  
20. Flash: The built-in flash lets you take pictures and videos in  
low light. You can also use it as a mini-flashlight.  
21. LEDIndicator: Shows your connection status at a glance.  
22. Speaker: Lets you hear the different ringers and sounds.  
You can mute the ringer when receiving incoming calls by  
pressing  
,
,
,
,
, or the Side Camera key.  
23. SubLCD: Lets you monitor the phone’s status and see who’s  
calling without opening the phone.  
24. Antenna: Fully extend the antenna for the best reception.  
25. HeadsetJack: Lets you insert the plug of a headset (sold  
separately) for hands-free phone use.  
26. ReadyLink/MemoButton: Allows you to access the Ready Link List  
or Voice Memo menu. (See “Using Ready Link” on page 137 or  
“Managing Voice Memos” on page 131.)  
27. SideVolumeKey: Lets you adjust the receiver volume during a  
call or ringer volume in standby mode.  
Section 2A: Your Phone – The Basics  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewing the Display Screen  
Your phone’s display screen provides a wealth of information about  
your phone’s status and options. This list identifies the symbols you’ll  
see on your phone’s display screen:  
shows your current signal strength. The more lines you have, the  
stronger your signal.  
means your phone cannot find a signal.  
tells you a call is in progress.  
indicates the Ready Link service is enabled.  
indicates the Ready Link service is enabled and the  
speakerphone mode is set to on.  
indicates the Ready Link service is disabled.  
indicates Sprint PCS Vision/Ready Link access is dormant.  
indicates Sprint PCS Vision/Ready Link access is active.  
indicates Sprint PCS Vision/Ready Link access is disabled.  
indicatesyouare“roaming” offthenetworkprovidedtoyou.  
indicates you have new picture messages waiting.  
indicates you have new voicemail messages waiting. Press and  
hold  
to call your voicemail box.  
indicates you have new text messages waiting.  
indicates you have picture messages, voicemail messages, and  
text messages waiting.  
indicates you have urgent messages waiting.  
indicates you have alarm clock notifications waiting.  
indicates you have schedule events or call alarms waiting.  
indicates you have missed voice calls.  
indicates you have missed Ready Link calls.  
indicates you have two or more types of notifications. However,  
message icons will appear if there are message notifications,  
since message notifications have priority.  
Section 2A: Your Phone – The Basics  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
shows the level of your battery charge. The more black you see,  
the more power you have left.  
shows your battery is charging.  
indicates you have menus to scroll (in four directions).  
indicates volume level 4 or 1 and vibrate feature are set.  
indicates a beep sound is set at level 1.  
indicates the vibrate feature is set.  
indicates the voice call ringer setting is off.  
indicates all the sound settings are off.  
indicates the Location Service of your phone is enabled.  
indicates the Location Service of your phone is disabled.  
indicates you have a new caller’s message waiting.  
indicates the Screen Call Auto setting is on.  
indicates your phone is in TTY mode.  
indicates Headset mode is set to Ready Link and a headset is  
connected.  
indicates the Alarm Clock setting is on.  
indicates the speakerphone mode is set to on.  
Note: Display indicators help you manage your roaming charges by letting you  
know when you’re off the network provided to you and whether you’re operating  
in digital or analog mode. (For more information, see Section 2D: Controlling Your  
Roaming Experience on page 76.)  
Tip: You can access display screen icon descriptions in your phone’s menu.  
Press , select Settings, select Phone Info, and select Help. To display an icon’s  
description, highlight it and press  
.
Section 2A: Your Phone – The Basics  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features ofYourWireless Phone  
Congratulations on the purchase of your Sanyo SCP-7400 Phone. This  
phone is lightweight, easy-to-use and reliable, and it also offers many  
significant features and service options. The following list previews  
some of those features and options and provides page numbers  
where you can find out more:  
ⅷ
Dual-band/tri-mode capability allows you to make and receive  
calls while on the network provided to you and to roam on other  
analog and 800 and 1900 MHz digital networks where roaming  
agreements have been implemented (page 76).  
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
Sprint PCS Vision provides access to the wireless Internet in  
digital mode (page 217).  
Email provides quick and convenient text messaging capabilities  
(page 235).  
Games, ringers, screen savers, and other applications can be  
downloaded to your phone to make your wireless phone as  
unique as you are (page 238).  
ⅷ
ⅷ
The built-in organizer lets you schedule alerts to remind you of  
important events (page 101).  
The Contacts directory (page 91) can store up to 500 numbers  
and 300 email and Web addresses in 300 entries (entries can store  
up to seven numbers each). A separate Ready Link Contacts List  
(page 140) provides easy access to up to 200 personal contacts.  
ⅷ
ⅷ
The built-in camera allows you to take full-color digital pictures  
and videos, view your pictures and videos using the phone’s  
display, and instantly send them to a family and friends using  
SM  
Sprint PCS Picture Mail service (page 158).  
Ready Link allows you to enjoy quick, two-way, “walkie-talkie-  
style” communication with one or several Ready Link users  
(page 137).  
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
The changeable faceplate makes you enjoy various appearance of  
your phone (page 15).  
The Automatic Speech Recognition (ASR) lets you place and  
receive calls by speaking to your phone (page 123).  
The Media Player allows you to enjoy the streaming video and  
audio with your phone (page 196).  
Section 2A: Your Phone – The Basics  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Faceplate  
RemovingandInstallingtheFaceplate  
ᮣ
To remove, press the faceplate release latch up and remove the  
faceplate from the phone at a 45-degree angle.  
Note: Be careful not to damage your fingernail when you remove the faceplate.  
ᮣ
To install, insert the faceplate into the opening on the front of  
the phone and press down firmly until the latch snaps into place.  
Section 2A: Your Phone – The Basics  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TurningYour Phone On and Off  
TurningYourPhoneOn  
Toturnyourphoneon:  
ᮣ
Press  
.
Once your phone is on, it displays “Looking for service...” which  
indicates that your phone is searching for a signal. When your phone  
finds a signal, it automatically enters standby mode – the phone’s idle  
state. At this point, you are ready to begin making and receiving calls.  
If your phone is unable to find a signal after 15 minutes of searching, a  
Power Save feature is automatically activated. When a signal is found,  
your phone automatically returns to standby mode.  
In Power Save mode, your phone searches for a signal periodically  
without your intervention. You can also initiate a search for  
service by pressing any key (when your phone is turned on).  
Tip: The Power Save feature helps to conserve your battery power when you are  
in an area where there is no signal.  
TurningYourPhoneOff  
Toturnyourphoneoff:  
ᮣ
Press and hold  
until you see the powering down  
animation on the display screen.  
Your screen remains blank while your phone is off (unless the battery  
is charging).  
Section 2A: Your Phone – The Basics  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UsingYour Phone’s Battery and Charger  
BatteryCapacity  
Your wireless phone is equipped with a Lithium Ion (LiIon) battery. It  
allows you to recharge your battery before it is fully drained. The  
battery provides up to 3.5 hours of continuous digital talk time (1.7  
hours in analog) or up to 288 hours of continuous digital standby  
time (22 hours in analog).  
When the battery reaches 5% of its capacity, the low battery icon  
appears. When there are approximately two minutes of talk time left,  
the phone sounds an audible alert and then powers down.  
Note: Long backlight settings, searching for service, vibrate mode, Ready Link  
mode, and browser use affect the battery’s talk and standby times.  
Tip: Be sure to watch your phone’s battery level indicator and charge the battery  
before it runs out of power.  
InstallingtheBattery  
ToinstalltheLiIonbattery:  
1. Place the battery into the space beneath  
the antenna with the metal contacts at  
the bottom, facing downward.  
2. Gently press down until it’s in place and  
the battery release latch snaps.  
RemovingtheBattery  
Toremoveyourbattery:  
1. Make sure the power is off so that you  
don’t lose any stored numbers or  
messages.  
2. Push the battery release latch up and  
hold the battery.  
3. Pull the battery up and out at a 45-degree  
angle.  
Section 2A: Your Phone – The Basics  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ChargingtheBattery  
Your phone’s LiIon battery is rechargeable and should be charged as  
soon as possible so you can begin using your phone.  
Keeping track of your battery’s charge is important. If your battery  
level becomes too low, your phone automatically turns off and you  
will lose all the information you were just working on. For a quick  
check of your phone’s battery level, glance at the battery charge  
indicator located in the upper-right corner of your phone’s display  
screen. If the battery charge is getting too low, the low battery icon  
(
) appears and the phone sounds a warning tone.  
Always use a Qwest-approved travel charger or vehicle power  
adapter to charge your battery.  
Warning! Using the wrong battery charger could cause damage to your phone  
and void the warranty.  
UsingtheTravelCharger  
Tousethetravelchargerprovidedwithyourphone:  
1. Plug the travel charger into a wall outlet.  
2. Plug the other end of the travel charger into the bottom of your  
phone (with the battery installed).  
Ⅲ
Chargingwhenyourphoneisturnedon:  
The battery icon  
appears on the display while charging.  
when charging is completed.  
Chargingwhenyourphoneisturnedoff:  
The battery icon turns to  
Ⅲ
The battery icon  
appears, and the message “BATTERY  
CHARGING--Power Off--” is shown on the display while  
charging. When the battery is completely discharged, it may  
take several minutes until the message is shown on the  
display. The battery icon turns to  
, and the message  
changes to “CHARGING COMPLETE--Power Off--” when  
charging is completed.  
It takes approximately 4 hours to fully recharge a completely  
rundown battery. With the Qwest-approved LiIon battery, you can  
recharge the battery before it becomes completely run down.  
Section 2A: Your Phone – The Basics  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DisplayingYour Phone Number  
Just in case you forget your phone number, your wireless phone can  
remind you.  
Todisplayyourphonenumber:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Contacts and press  
.
3. Select MyPhone# and press  
.
Note: To access the phone’s main menu, press  
from standby mode. Menu  
items may be selected by highlighting them with the navigation key and pressing  
, or you can press the number corresponding to the menu item on your keypad.  
Tip: You can also display your phone number from the Phone Info menu.  
Press , select Settings, select Phone Info, and select Phone#/User ID.  
Section 2A: Your Phone – The Basics  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making andAnswering Calls  
Making Calls  
Placing a call from your wireless phone is as easy as making a call  
from any land line phone. Just enter the number and press  
you’re on your way to clear calls.  
and  
Toplaceacallusingyourkeypad:  
1. Make sure your phone is on.  
2. Enter a phone number. (If you make a mistake while dialing,  
press  
to erase one digit at a time. Press and hold  
to  
erase the entire number.)  
3. Press or . (To place a call when you are roaming and  
Call Guard is enabled, see “Using Call Guard” on page 80.)  
4. When you’re finished, press to end the call.  
Tip: When making calls off the network provided to you, always dial using 11  
digits (1 + area code + phone number).  
You can also place calls from your phone by Speed Dialing (page 31)  
and using your Call History listings (page 88).  
Important: To maximize performance when using your wireless phone, extend  
the antenna before a call and do not touch the antenna during a call.  
Correct  
Incorrect  
Section 2A: Your Phone – The Basics  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dialing Options  
Dialing options are displayed when you press Options (right softkey)  
after entering numbers in the phone’s standby mode.  
To select an option, highlight it and press  
.
ⅷ
Abbrev. Dial to dial the phone number in your Contacts list that  
ends with the appropriate digits you entered. (See “Using  
Abbreviated Dialing” on page 31.)  
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
Call to dial the phone number.  
Call:SpeakerOn to dial the phone number in speakerphone mode.  
SendMessage to send a text message, picture, or video (mobile  
numbers only). (See page 227 or 183 for details.)  
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
SavePhone# to save the phone number in your Contacts list. (See  
“Saving a Phone Number” on page 28.)  
Find to display Contacts list entries that end with the digits you  
entered. (See “Finding a Phone Number” on page 29.)  
H HardPause to insert a hard pause. (See “Dialing and Saving  
Phone Numbers With Pauses” on page 29.)  
T 2-Sec. Pause to insert a 2-second pause. (See “Dialing and  
Saving Phone Numbers With Pauses” on page 29.)  
Hyphen to insert a hyphen. (Hyphens are generally for visual  
appeal only; they are not necessary when entering numbers.)  
Tip: To speed dial a phone number, press and hold the appropriate speed dial key  
(locations 2-9). See “Assigning Speed Dial Numbers” on page 96.  
Section 2A: Your Phone – The Basics  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Answering Calls  
Toansweranincomingcallwiththeflipopen:  
1. Make sure your phone is on. (If your phone is off, incoming calls  
go to voicemail.)  
2. Press  
or  
to answer an incoming call. (Depending on  
your phone’s settings, you may also answer incoming calls by  
opening the phone or by pressing any number key. See “Setting  
Any Key Answer” on page 59 for more information.)  
Tip: Press Ignore (left softkey) when you do not want to answer the call.  
Toansweranincomingcallwiththeflipclosed:  
1. Make sure your phone is on. (If your phone is off, incoming calls  
go to voicemail.)  
2. When your phone rings or vibrates, press and hold the Side  
Voice/Call key (  
) on the right side of the phone. (The call  
will be answered in speakerphone mode.)  
– or –  
Open the phone to use the earpiece.  
Note: If the setting for Open Flip is set to “No Action,” opening the phone will not  
answer the call. (See “Setting the Open/Close Flip Option” on page 58.)  
Your phone notifies you of incoming calls in the following ways:  
ⅷ
The phone rings and/or vibrates.  
ⅷ
The LED flashes.  
ⅷ
The backlight illuminates.  
ⅷ
The screen displays an incoming call message.  
ⅷ
If available, the phone number of the caller is displayed.  
ⅷ
If the phone number is in your Contacts list, the contact’s name is  
displayed.  
Section 2A: Your Phone – The Basics  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following options are also displayed by pressing Options (right  
softkey). To select an option, highlight it and press  
.
ⅷ
CallGuard to answer the call when you are in roaming mode.  
See page 80 for setting Call Guard.  
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
Answer to answer the call.  
Answer:Speaker to answer the call in speakerphone mode.  
ScreenCall to answer the call by using a pre-recorded  
announcement. (Appears when you are in a network service area  
or digital roaming area. See page 134 for the setting.)  
ⅷ
QuietRinger to mute the ringer. (Appears when the ringer is set.)  
Tip: Your wireless phone offers additional ways to answer calls. (See page 57 for  
Auto Answer and see page 59 for Any Key Answer.)  
AnsweringaRoamCallWithCallGuardEnabled  
Call Guard is an option that helps you manage your roaming charges  
when making or receiving calls while outside the network provided  
to you. Please see Section 2D: Controlling Your Roaming Experience  
for more information about roaming.  
ToansweracallwhenyouareroamingandCallGuardisenabled:  
1. Press  
or  
.
2. Press  
to proceed while the pop-up message is displayed.  
Note: When your phone is off, in an active Sprint PCS Vision Connection, or on a  
Ready Link call, incoming calls go directly to voicemail.  
Section 2A: Your Phone – The Basics  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EndingaCall  
To disconnect a call when you are finished:  
WiththeFlipopen:  
ᮣ
Close the phone or press  
.
WiththeFlipclosed:  
ᮣ
Press and hold  
.
Note: If the setting for Close Flip is not set to “End,” closing the phone will not end  
the call. (See “Setting the Open/Close Flip Option” on page 58.)  
Tip: Time/Date is displayed when you press  
while the phone is in use.  
Using the Speakerphone  
The speakerphone feature lets you hear audio through the speaker  
and talk without holding the phone. When the speakerphone is  
activated, use the volume control keys on the side of the phone to  
adjust the volume.  
Toturnthespeakerphoneonduringacall:  
ᮣ
Press  
– or –  
.
Press Options (right softkey), highlight SpeakerOn, and press  
.
.
Toturnthespeakerphoneoffduringacall:  
ᮣ
Press  
– or –  
.
Press Options (right softkey), highlight SpeakerOff, and press  
Warning! Due to higher volume levels, do not place the phone near your ear  
during speakerphone use.  
Section 2A: Your Phone – The Basics  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Ringer Volume  
To change the ringer volume, press the Side Volume key when the  
phone is open and in standby mode.  
Note: To change the ringer volume from the main menu, see “Adjusting the  
Phone’s Volume Settings” on page 41.  
Adjusting Volume During a Conversation  
When you need to adjust the receiver volume during a conversation,  
use the side volume key, or press the navigation key up or down  
while a call is in progress.  
Muting a Call  
There are times when it’s necessary to mute a call so that your caller  
does not hear you or certain background noise.  
Tomuteacallwiththeflipopen:  
ᮣ
Press Options (right softkey), highlight Mute, and press  
.
(When the phone is muted, “Mute” appears on the display.)  
Tounmuteacallwiththeflipopen:  
ᮣ
Press Options (right softkey), highlight Unmute, and press  
.
Tomuteacallwiththeflipclosed:  
ᮣ
Simply press  
(located on the side of your phone).  
Tounmuteacallwiththeflipclosed:  
ᮣ
Press  
once again during a call.  
Section 2A: Your Phone – The Basics  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Missed Call Notification  
When an incoming call is not answered, the Missed Call log and the  
icon are displayed on your screen.  
TocalltheMissedCallentry:  
ᮣ
Press  
or  
.
Tip: If you have two or more notifications, the event list will appear.  
ToerasetheMissedCalllog:  
ᮣ
Press Dismiss (right softkey).  
Tip: If you press  
before checking your notification, Events (right softkey)  
appears in standby mode. Press Events (right softkey) to display the notification list.  
Calling Emergency Numbers  
You can place calls to 911 (dial  
and press  
),  
even if your phone is locked or your account is restricted. Once you  
dial the numbers, your phone will enter Emergency mode.  
Press Options (right softkey) to display the options. To select an option,  
highlight it and press  
.
ⅷ
SpeakerOn to activate speakerphone mode. (If you are in  
speakerphone mode, the option will appear as SpeakerOff to  
deactivate.)  
ⅷ
ⅷ
UnlockPhone to unlock your phone (appears only if the phone is  
locked).  
CloseMenu to close the pop-up menu (appears only if the phone  
is unlocked).  
Tip: Press My Phone (left softkey) to display your phone number during an  
Emergency call.  
ToexitEmergencymode:  
1. Press  
2. Press Options (right softkey) to display the options.  
3. Highlight ExitEmergency and press  
.
.
Section 2A: Your Phone – The Basics  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TodisplayEmergencymodeoptions:  
1. Press during a 911 call.  
2. Press Options (right softkey).  
Ⅲ
Call911 to call 911.  
Ⅲ
Call911:Speaker to call 911 in speakerphone mode.  
Ⅲ
ExitEmergency to exit Emergency mode.  
3. Select an option and press  
.
In-Call Options  
During a call, your phone displays menu options when you press  
Options (right softkey).  
To select an option, highlight it and press  
.
ⅷ
Flash to answer an incoming Call Waiting call or to connect a third  
party during Three-Way Calling.  
ⅷ
ⅷ
Mute or Unmute to mute or reactivate your phone’s microphone.  
SpeakerOn or SpeakerOff to activate or deactivate speakerphone  
mode. You can adjust the speakerphone volume using the Side  
Volume key.  
Warning! Due to higher volume levels, do not place the phone near your ear  
during speakerphone use.  
ⅷ
Three-WayCall to call a third party.  
ⅷ
CallHistory to access the Call History menu. (See “Managing Call  
History” on page 86.)  
ⅷ
Contacts to access the Contacts menu. (See “Using the Contacts  
Directory” on page 91.)  
ⅷ
Messaging to access the Messaging menu. (See “Messaging” on  
page 225.)  
ⅷ
Settings to access the Settings menu. (See “Controlling Your  
Phone’s Settings” on page 37.)  
ⅷ
Tools/Extras to access the Tools/Extras menu. (See “Personal  
Organizer” on page 100.)  
Note: The Flash menu appears only for Call Waiting and Three-Way Calling.  
The Mute menu does not appear during a 911 call. The Three-Way Call menu  
does not appear in Roaming areas.  
Section 2A: Your Phone – The Basics  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
End-of-Call Options  
To display the following options, press Options (right softkey) within  
10 seconds after disconnecting a call.  
To select an option, highlight it and press  
.
ⅷ
CallAgain to dial the phone number.  
ⅷ
Call:SpeakerOn to dial the phone number in speakerphone mode.  
ⅷ
SavePhone# to save the phone number in your Contacts list.  
Ⅲ
GotoPhoneBook appears when the number is already in  
your Contacts list. (See “Saving a Phone Number” below.)  
Note: The End-of-Call options are not displayed for calls identified as No ID or  
Restricted.  
Saving a Phone Number  
Your SCP-7400 can store up to 500 phone numbers in up to 300  
Contacts entries (an entry may contain up to seven numbers). Each  
entry’s name can contain 16 characters. Your phone automatically  
sorts the Contacts entries alphabetically. (For more information, see  
Section 2G: Using the Contacts Directory on page 91.)  
Tosaveanumberfromstandbymode:  
1. Enter a phone number.  
2. Press Options (right softkey).  
3. Highlight SavePhone# and press  
4. Select a label by highlighting Mobile, Home, Work, Pager, Fax,  
Other, or NoLabel and press  
.
.
5. Enter a name and press . If you have already stored entries  
in the Contacts list, you are prompted to select the following  
entry modes:  
Ⅲ
NewName to enter a new name.  
Ⅲ
FromPh. Book to select a name from the Contacts entry list.  
6. Press Save (left softkey).  
Section 2A: Your Phone – The Basics  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Finding a Phone Number  
You can search Contacts list entries for phone numbers that contain a  
specific string of numbers.  
Tofindaphonenumber:  
1. Enter the last four or more digits of the number and press  
Options (right softkey). (The more numbers you enter, the more  
specific the search becomes.)  
2. Highlight Find and press . (The Contacts entry that ends with  
the digits you entered appears.)  
3. Scroll to your desired entry.  
Ⅲ
Press  
Press  
to display the entry details.  
or to dial.  
Ⅲ
Dialing and Saving Phone NumbersWith Pauses  
You can dial or save phone numbers with pauses for use with  
automated systems, such as voicemail or credit card billing numbers.  
There are two types of pauses available on your phone:  
ⅷ
HardPause sends the next set of numbers when you press  
.
ⅷ
2-Sec. Pause automatically sends the next set of numbers after  
two seconds.  
Note: You can have multiple pauses in a phone number and combine 2-second  
and hard pauses.  
Todialorsavephonenumberswithpauses:  
1. Enter the phone number and press Options (right softkey).  
2. Highlight either HardPause or 2-Sec. Pause and press  
.
(Hard pauses are displayed as a “H” and 2-second pauses as a “T”.)  
3. Enter additional numbers (for example, a passcode or an  
extension).  
4. To dial the number, press  
with a hard pause, press  
– or –  
or  
. (When dialing a number  
to send the next set of numbers.)  
To save the number in your Contacts list, press Options (right  
softkey), highlight SavePhone#, and press  
.
Section 2A: Your Phone – The Basics  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making International CallsWith Plus Code Dialing  
Your phone’s Plus Code Dialing feature can automatically dial the  
international access code when you are traveling outside of the  
United States.  
TomakeacallusingPlusCodeDialing:  
1. From standby mode, press and hold  
until a “+” sign  
appears on the phone display.  
2. Enter the country code and phone number and press  
or  
.
Toremovetheplussignfromyourphone’sdisplay:  
ᮣ
Press and hold  
while the plus sign is displayed or press  
to cancel the call.  
Dialing From the Contacts Directory  
TodialdirectlyfromaContactsentry:  
1. Press  
2. Select Contacts and press  
3. Select Find/AddEntry and press  
to access the main menu.  
.
.
Shortcut: Press the navigation key right to list entries.  
4. Scroll to the desired entry in the Contacts list and press  
5. Select the number you want to call.  
.
6. Press Options (right softkey) for the menu options.  
7. Highlight Call or Call:SpeakerOn and press  
to place a call.  
Tip: You can also place a call by pressing  
step 5 above.  
,
, or Call (left softkey) during  
Note: The icons next to each entry represent the Contacts labels (for example,  
Mobile, Home, Work, etc.). A triangle next to an icon means there is another label  
for the entry. Press the navigation key right or left to select the desired label.  
Section 2A: Your Phone – The Basics  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Speed Dialing  
With this feature, you can dial your favorite entries using one key press  
for locations 2-9. (See “Assigning Speed Dial Numbers” on page 96.)  
Tousespeeddialforvoicecalls:  
ᮣ
From standby mode, press and hold the appropriate key for  
approximately two seconds.  
– or –  
ᮣ
From standby mode, press the appropriate key and  
press  
or  
.
The display confirms that the number has been dialed when it shows  
“Connecting...”.  
TousespeeddialforReadyLinkcalls:  
ᮣ
From standby mode, press the appropriate key then press and  
hold  
. (See “Assigning Speed Dialing for Ready Link Entries”  
on page 154.)  
The display confirms that the number has been dialed when it shows  
“R-Link calling...”.  
Note: Speed dialing is not available when you are roaming; when you are  
roaming off the network provided to you, you must always dial using eleven digits  
(1 + area code + number).  
Using Abbreviated Dialing  
Abbreviated Dialing is another form of speed dialing. It allows you to  
dial a number by entering the last 3-6 digits of any number in your  
Contacts directory. This feature becomes available when you set the  
abbreviated dialing enable and enter the appropriate digits of a  
phone number. See page 60 for the setting.  
ToplaceacallusingAbbreviatedDialing:  
1. Dial the last 3-6 digits of a contact’s phone number.  
2. Press Options (right softkey) to display the dialing options.  
3. Highlight Abbrev. Dial and press  
,
, or  
.
Tip: You can also place a call by pressing  
or  
during step 2 above.  
Note: If there is no matched number, your phone dials the number you set for  
abbreviated dial with the last four or five digits you entered. If there are matched  
numbers in your Contacts list, the abbreviated dial list will be displayed. To place  
a call, select a number and press  
.
Section 2A: Your Phone – The Basics  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EnteringText  
Selecting a Character Input Mode  
Your phone provides convenient ways to enter words, letters,  
punctuation, and numbers whenever you are prompted to enter text  
(for example, when adding a Contacts entry or when sending email  
messages).  
Tochangethecharacterinputmode:  
1. When you display a screen where you can enter text, press  
Mode (right softkey).  
2. Select a character input mode:  
Ⅲ
T9Word to enter characters using predictive  
T9 Text Input (see page 33).  
Ⅲ
Alphabet to enter characters by tapping the keypad  
(see page 34).  
Ⅲ
SYMBOL to enter symbols (see page 35).  
Ⅲ
NUMBER to enter numbers (see page 35).  
Ⅲ
PRESETSUFFIX to enter a preset suffix (see page 35).  
Ⅲ
SMILEYS to enter smile pictures (see page 36).  
Ⅲ
Emoticons to enter pictorial symbols (see page 36).  
Section 2A: Your Phone – The Basics  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entering Characters Using T9Text Input  
T9 Text Input lets you enter text in your SCP-7400 by pressing keys  
just once per letter. (To select the T9Word mode when entering text,  
see “Selecting a Character Input Mode” on page 32.)  
T9 Text Input analyzes the letters you enter using an intuitive word  
database and creates a suitable word. (The word may change as you  
enter more letters.) If the word you want does not display after you  
have entered all the letters, press  
to scroll through additional  
word selections. To accept a word and insert a space, press  
.
If you make a mistake, press to erase a single character. Press  
and hold to delete an entire entry.  
AddingaWordtotheT9Database  
If a word you want to enter does not display as an option when you  
are using T9 Text Input, you can add it to the database.  
ToaddawordtotheT9TextInputdatabase:  
1. Select the Alphabet input mode. (See “Selecting a Character  
Input Mode” on page 32.)  
2. Enter the word using multi-tap text entry. (See “Entering  
Characters by Tapping the Keypad” on page 34.)  
3. Press Mode (right softkey), highlight T9Word, and press  
.
(The word will appear as an option the next time you scroll  
through options during T9 Text Input.)  
For more information about T9 Text Input, visit the Tegic Website at  
www.T9.com.  
Section 2A: Your Phone – The Basics  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entering Characters byTapping the Keypad  
To enter characters by tapping the keypad, select the Alphabet mode  
(see “Selecting a Character Input Mode” on page 32). Press the  
corresponding key repeatedly until the desired character appears.  
By default, the first letter of an entry is capitalized and following  
letters are lowercase.  
Characters scroll in the following order:  
English Sequence  
Key  
Upper Case  
Lower Case  
.,@ 1 ? ! # /  
*
A B C 2  
a b c 2  
D E F 3  
G H I 4  
J K L 5  
M N O 6  
P Q R S 7  
T U V 8  
W XY Z 9  
0
d e f 3  
g h i 4  
j k l 5  
m n o 6  
p q r s 7  
t u v 8  
w x y z 9  
Space  
Unshifted One-character- shifted Caps Lock  
In Spanish mode, characters scroll in the following order:  
Spanish Sequence  
Key  
Upper Case  
Lower Case  
.,@ 1 ¿ ? ¡ ! # /  
*
A Á B C 2  
a á b c 2  
D E É F 3  
G H I Í 4  
J K L 5  
d e é f 3  
g h i í 4  
j k l 5  
M N Ñ O Ó 6  
P Q R S 7  
T U Ú Ü V 8  
W XY Z 9  
0
m n ñ o ó 6  
p q r s 7  
t u ú ü v 8  
w x y z 9  
Space  
Unshifted One-character- shifted Caps Lock  
(See page 66 for changing to Spanish language mode.)  
After a character is entered, the cursor automatically advances to the  
next space after two seconds or when you enter a character on a  
different key.  
Tip: The beginning of the word after the space is changed to upper/lower case  
depending on shift mode. You can change the shift mode by pressing  
.
Section 2A: Your Phone – The Basics  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entering Symbols,Numbers,Preset Suffixes,  
Smileys,and Emoticons  
Toentersymbols:  
1. In a text entry field, press Mode (right softkey).  
2. Highlight SYMBOL and press  
.
3. Highlight the line that includes your desired symbol.  
4. Press the corresponding key (1-8) with each symbol.  
– or –  
Highlight your desired symbol by using the navigation key and  
press  
.
Toenternumbers:  
1. In a text entry field, press Mode (right softkey).  
2. Highlight NUMBER and press  
.
3. Press the corresponding number key to enter the number.  
Shortcut: Press and hold the corresponding number key to enter the number  
directly in alphabet mode or T9 mode.  
Toenterpresetsuffixes:  
The Preset Suffix menu is a preprogrammed list of common prefixes,  
suffixes, and punctuation strings (for example, “www.”, “.com”, and  
“//”) designed to make text entry easier and more efficient.  
1. In a text entry field, press Mode (right softkey).  
2. Highlight PRESETSUFFIX and press  
3. Highlight your desired word by using the navigation key and  
press  
.
.
Section 2A: Your Phone – The Basics  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Toentersmileys:  
1. In a text entry field, press Mode (right softkey).  
2. Highlight SMILEYS and press  
.
3. Highlight the line that includes your desired smiley.  
4. Press the corresponding key (1-4) with each smiley.  
– or –  
Highlight your desired smiley by using the navigation key and  
press  
.
Note: Preset Suffix and Smileys do not apply in Ready Link mode.  
Toenteremoticons:  
1. In a text message entry field, press Mode (right softkey).  
2. Highlight Emoticons and press  
.
3. Highlight the line that includes your desired emoticon.  
4. Press the corresponding key (1-4) with each emoticon.  
– or –  
Highlight your desired emoticon by using the navigation key  
and press  
.
Note: Emoticons are only available when composing text messages.  
Section 2A: Your Phone – The Basics  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 2B  
Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
In This Section  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
SoundSettings  
DisplaySettings  
LocationSettings  
AirplaneMode  
TTYUse  
PhoneSetupOptions  
Usingthemenuoptionsavailableonyourwirelessphone, youcan  
customizeyourphonetosound, look, andoperatejustthewayyouwantitto.  
This section describes how you can change your phone’s settings to  
best suit your needs. Take a few moments to review these options and  
to adjust or add settings that are right for you.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sound Settings  
Ringer Types  
Ringer types help you identify incoming calls and messages. You can  
assign ringer types to individual Contacts entries, types of calls, and  
types of messages.  
ⅷ
PreprogrammedRingers include a variety of standard ringer types  
and familiar music.  
ⅷ
VibratingRinger alerts you to calls or messages without  
disturbing others.  
ⅷ
DownloadedRingerscan be downloaded right to your phone.  
(See “Downloading Premium Services Content” on page 238 and  
“Ringers” on page 242.)  
SelectingRingerTypesforVoiceCalls  
Your Sanyo SCP-7400 provides a variety of ringer options that allow  
you to customize your ringer and volume settings. These options  
allow you to identify incoming calls by the ringer.  
Toselectaringertypeforvoicecalls:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Sounds and press  
.
4. Select RingerType and press  
.
5. Select VoiceCalls and press  
.
6. Select WithCallerID or NoCallerID and press  
.
7. Scroll to your desired ringer type and press  
.
Toselectadistinctiveringerforvoicecallswhileroaming:  
1. Follow steps 1-5 above.  
2. Select Roaming and press  
.
3. Select Distinctive and press  
.
Ⅲ
To confirm the ringer, press Play (right softkey).  
Ⅲ
If you want to deactivate this feature, select Normal during  
step 3 above.  
Note: When you are in analog area, the Distinctive ringer will be played even if  
your voice call setting of roaming is Normal.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SelectingRingerTypesforReadyLinkCalls  
ToselectaringertypeforReadyLinkcalls:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Sounds and press  
.
4. Select RingerType and press  
.
5. Select ReadyLink and press  
.
6. Select ReadyLinkCalls, R-LinkMissed, or R-LinkFloorTone, and  
press  
.
7. Scroll to your desired ringer type and press  
.
SelectingRingerTypesforVoicemail,Messages,or  
Calendar/Alarm  
Toselectaringertypeforvoicemail,messages,orcalendar/alarm:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Sounds and press  
.
4. Select RingerType and press  
.
5. Select Voicemail, Messages, or Calendar/Alarm, and press  
.
6. Press , scroll to your desired ringer type, and press  
.
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting a Tone Length  
Longer tone lengths may be better for tone recognition when dialing  
voicemail or other automated systems.  
Toselectatonelength:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select Sounds and press  
4. Select Others and press  
.
.
.
5. Select ToneLength and press  
.
6. Select Short or Long and press  
.
Setting a Start-up/Power-offTone  
1. Follow steps 1-4 in “Selecting a Tone Length.”  
2. Select Start-upTone or Power-offTone and press  
.
3. Scroll to your desired tone and press  
.
Tip: You can set the volume of Start-up Tone and Power-off Tone. See next page.  
Using Voice Prompt  
This feature allows you to hear voice prompts at Automatic Speech  
Recognition (ASR), Voice Memo, Screen Call setting, etc. (default  
setting is On).  
Todeactivatethisfeature:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select Sounds and press  
4. Select Others and press  
.
.
.
5. Select VoicePrompt and press  
6. Select Off and press  
Tip: When ringer volume is set to “Silence All,” voice prompts cannot be heard.  
.
.
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up Key Press Echo  
With this feature, your phone echoes the number when you press the  
keypad. This feature is available when you are in standby mode.  
ToactivateKeyPressEcho:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select Sounds and press  
4. Select Others and press  
.
.
.
5. Select KeyPressEcho and press  
.
6. Select On and press  
.
Ⅲ
To deactivate this feature, select Off during step 6 above.  
Adjusting the Phone’s Volume Settings  
You can adjust your phone’s volume settings to suit your needs and  
your environment.  
Toadjusttheringerandkeyvolume:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Sounds and press  
.
4. Select Ringer/KeyVol. and press  
5. Select RingerVolume, Calendar/Alarm, Start-up/Pw-off, or KeyBeep  
and press  
6. Adjust a volume level by pressing the navigation key up or down  
and press  
.
.
.
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Toadjusttheearpieceorspeakervolume:  
1. Press to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Sounds and press  
.
4. Select ReceiverVol. and press  
5. Select either Earpiece or Speaker and press  
6. Adjust a volume level by pressing the navigation key up or down  
and press  
.
.
.
Tip: You can adjust the ringer volume in standby mode (or the earpiece volume  
during a call) by using the Side Volume key.  
Toadjusttheapplicationvolume:  
This setting is available for the volume of video, Media Player,  
downloaded data, and browser.  
1. Follow steps 1-3 above.  
2. Select ApplicationVol. and press  
3. Press , adjust a volume level by pressing the navigation key  
up or down, and press  
.
.
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alert Notification  
Your phone can alert you with an audible tone when you change  
service areas, once a minute during a voice call, for incoming or  
missed Ready Link calls, or when a call has been connected.  
Tosetalerts:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select Sounds and press  
4. Select Alerts and press  
.
.
.
5. Select your desired option and press  
.
Ⅲ
Service sets an alert to notify you of network services  
parameter changes.  
Ⅲ
ReadyLink sets an alert to notify you of Ready Link calls.  
Select ReadyLinkCalls for incoming Ready Link calls, or  
R-LinkMissed for missed Ready Link calls.  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
Voicemail sets an alert to notify you of voice messages.  
Messaging sets an alert to notify you of text messages.  
MinuteBeep sets a minute reminder that beeps ten seconds  
before the end of each minute during a call.  
Ⅲ
SignalFade sets an alert to notify you when your phone loses  
a signal during a call.  
Tip: You can select Once or Repeat Alert if you select Ready Link Calls,  
R-Link Missed, Voicemail, or Messaging. Repeat Alert sounds an alert every two  
minutes for twenty minutes.  
Tip: To set alerts for Ready Link calls, see “Setting an Alert Notification for Ready  
Link Calls” on page 156 for details.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SilenceAll  
There may be times when you need to silence your phone entirely.  
The phone’s Silence All option allows you to mute all sounds without  
turning your phone off.  
ToactivateSilenceAll:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Sounds and press  
.
4. Select Ringer/KeyVol. and press  
.
5. Select RingerVolume and press  
.
6. Press the navigation key down until SilenceAll appears on the  
display and press  
.
Tip: When Ringer Volume is set as Silence All, other items are changed to Off and  
cannot be highlighted.  
TodeactivateSilenceAll:  
ᮣ
Press the volume key up repeatedly to select a desired  
volume level.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display Settings  
Changing theText Greeting  
The text greeting can be up to fifteen characters and is displayed on  
your phone’s screen in standby mode. You may choose to display a  
custom greeting or you may display the phone’s default greeting on  
the screen.  
Todisplayorchangeyourcustomgreeting:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select Display and press  
4. Select Greeting and press  
.
.
.
5. Select Custom and press  
.
Ⅲ
You can customize the greeting by entering a personalized  
greeting. (See “Entering Text” on page 32.)  
6. Press  
.
Todisplaythedefaultgreeting:  
1. Follow steps 1-4 above.  
2. Select Default and press  
.
Ⅲ
When you are in Ready Link mode, “Ready Link” appears on  
the display instead of the default greeting.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the BacklightTime Length  
The backlight setting lets you select how long the display screen and  
keypad are backlit after any key press is made.  
TochangetheMainLCDorSubLCDbacklightsetting:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select Display and press  
4. Select Backlight and press  
.
.
.
5. Select MainLCD or SubLCD and press  
.
6. Select AlwaysOn, AlwaysOff, or your defined time length and  
press  
.
Ⅲ
AlwaysOff always turns the backlight off.  
Ⅲ
AlwaysOn keeps the backlight on indefinitely.  
Note: The Always On setting returns to the previous value the next time you turn  
on the phone.  
TochangetheKeypadbacklightsetting:  
1. Select Key during step 5 above, and press  
.
2. Select AlwaysOff or your defined time length and press  
.
Note: Long backlight settings affect the battery’s talk and standby times.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Display ScreenAnimation  
Your new wireless phone offers options for what you see on the  
display screen during various phone functions.  
Tochangetheanimationdisplay:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select Display and press  
4. Select Animation and press  
.
.
.
5. Select Standby, OutgoingCalls, or ServiceSearch, and press  
.
6. Press , scroll to your desired option and press  
.
Ⅲ
Press Preview (right softkey) to see a sample display.  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
For standby, you can also set the animation starting time.  
Select after and press , then highlight your desired setting  
time and press  
To deactivate this feature, select Off during step 6 above.  
.
Changing the Display for Incoming Calls  
You can set the color or downloaded image to be shown on the  
Incoming Calls display.  
Tosetyourincomingcallsdisplay:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Display and press  
.
4. Select IncomingCalls and press  
.
5. Press , scroll to your desired color or image, and press  
.
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Display for Area Name  
This feature enables you to show the area of the phone number you  
are calling or are called from when the number is not registered in  
your Contacts list. For example, a call to or from 213-555-5555 will  
display “California.”  
Tosetyourareanamedisplay:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Display and press  
.
4. Select MatchAreaCode and press  
.
5. Select On or Off and press  
.
Ⅲ
This feature is available only when the phone number is  
10 digits, or 11 digits beginning with 1 and matches an  
area code.  
Ⅲ
The area name will not be displayed when the number of an  
incoming call is saved in your Contacts list.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Display for Standby Mode  
This feature enables you to select a variety of items to display in  
standby mode.  
Tosetyourstandbydisplay:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Display and press  
.
4. Select StandbyDisplay and press  
.
5. Select MainLCD or SubLCD and press  
.
6. Select your desired item and press  
.
Ⅲ
ScreenSaver selects the screen saver to display.  
Calendar displays the Calendar. (Main LCD only.)  
DigitalClock displays the local time in digital view.  
AnalogClock displays the local time in analog view.  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
WorldClock displays the time of the selected city or country  
along with the local time. Press the navigation key right or  
left to change the city or country. Press Summer (left  
softkey) or Standard (right softkey) to change between  
Daylight Savings and standard time if applicable. (The  
icon indicates Daylight Savings time.)  
Tip: You can also display the World Clock from Tools/Extras menu. (See “Using  
the World Clock” on page 113.)  
Ⅲ
Default returns the standby display to its default setting.  
7. Press  
to save the setting to follow each system prompt or  
when confirming the preview display.  
Tip: In an area without service, the signal search display appears instead of the  
display for standby mode.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Screen Saver  
Your new phone offers you the option of displaying a screen saver  
while in standby mode.  
Toassignascreensaver:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Display and press  
.
4. Select StandbyDisplay and press  
5. Select MainLCD or SubLCD and press  
6. Select ScreenSaver and press  
.
.
.
7. Press , scroll to your desired screen saver and press  
.
8. Press Save (left softkey) to save the screen saver.  
Ⅲ
To see a display preview of an image, press Preview (right  
softkey) during step 7 above.  
Changing the Phone’s Menu Style  
Your phone allows you to choose how the main menu appears on  
your display screen.  
Toselectthemainmenustyle:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Display and press  
.
4. Select MainMenu and press  
.
5. Select either Graphic or Text and press  
.
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Display for My Buddy  
This feature enables you to see a funny animation on the Main LCD  
and Sub LCD by opening and closing the flip.  
ToactivateordeactivateMyBuddy:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select Display and press  
4. Select MyBuddy and press  
.
.
.
5. Select MainLCD or SubLCD and press  
.
6. Select On or Off and press  
.
Ⅲ
Press Preview (right softkey) during step 6 above to see a  
display preview.  
Changing the Background  
You can customize your phone display’s appearance by selecting a  
color scheme to reflect your personality.  
Tochangethedisplay’sbackground:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Display and press  
.
4. Select Background and press  
.
5. Select MainLCD or SubLCD and press  
.
6. Select your desired color and press  
.
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Font Size  
You can change the font size settings for the message notification and  
browser.  
Tochangethefontsize:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select Display and press  
4. Select FontSize and press  
.
.
.
5. Select either Message or Browser and press  
.
6. Select your desired font size.  
Ⅲ
Press Preview (right softkey) to display a font size example.  
7. Press  
to set the selected font.  
Tip: From the font example display, select your desired font size by pressing the  
navigation key right or left.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Location Settings  
Your Sanyo SCP-7400 Phone is equipped with a Location feature for  
use in connection with location-based services that may be available  
in the future.  
The Location feature allows the network to detect your position.  
Turning Location off will hide your location from everyone  
except 911.  
Note: Even if the Location feature is enabled, no service may use your location  
without your express permission.  
Toenableyourphone’sLocationfeature:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Location and press . (You will see a message on the  
display.)  
4. Press  
or OK (left softkey) to continue.  
Ⅲ
Press the navigation key down to read the whole message.  
5. Select On and press  
.
Ⅲ
To deactivate this feature, select Off during step 5 above.  
When the Location feature is on, your phone’s standby screen will  
display the  
display.  
icon. When Location is turned off, the  
icon will  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Airplane Mode  
Airplane Mode allows you to use many of your phone’s features, such  
as Games, Voice Memos, etc., when you are in an airplane or in any  
other area where making or receiving calls or data is prohibited.  
When your phone is in Airplane Mode, it cannot send or receive any  
calls or access online information.  
TosetyourphonetoAirplaneMode:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Others and press  
.
4. Select AirplaneMode and press . (You will see a message on  
the display.)  
5. Press  
or OK (left softkey) to continue.  
Ⅲ
Press Cancel (right softkey) to return to previous menu.  
6. Select On and press  
.
Ⅲ
To deactivate this feature, select Off during step 6 above.  
While in Airplane Mode, your phone’s standby screen will display  
“Phone off.”  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TTY Use  
A TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a  
telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf  
or hard of hearing, or who have speech or language disabilities, to  
communicate by telephone.  
Your phone is compatible with select TTY devices. Please check with  
the manufacturer of your TTY device to ensure that it supports digital  
wireless transmission. Your phone and TTY device will connect via a  
special cable that plugs into your phone’s headset jack. If this cable  
was not provided with your TTY device, contact your TTY device  
manufacturer to purchase the connector cable.  
When establishing your wireless service, please call Qwest via  
the state Telecommunications Relay Service (TRS) by first dialing  
. Then provide the state TRS with this number:  
866-727-4889.  
ToturnTTY modeonoroff:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Others and press  
.
4. Select TTY and press . (You will see a message on the display.)  
5. Press or OK (left softkey) to continue.  
6. Select Enable or Disable and press  
.
Note: When you connect TTY devices, your phone will display the icon in TTY  
mode. If TTY mode is enabled, the audio quality of non-TTY devices connected to  
the headset jack may be impaired.  
IMPORTANT NOTICE: 911 Emergency Calling  
Qwest recommends that TTY users make Emergency calls by other means,  
including Telecommunications Relay Services (TRS), analog cellular, and  
landline communications. Wireless TTY calls to 911 may be corrupted when  
received by public safety answering points (PSAPs) rendering some  
communications unintelligible. The problem encountered appears related to TTY  
equipment or software used by PSAPs. This matter has been brought to the  
attention of the FCC, and the wireless industry and PSAP community are  
currently working to resolve this.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Phone Setup Options  
Shortcut  
Your phone offers you the option of assigning a shortcut key to a  
favorite or often-used function. Pressing the navigation key to the left  
in standby mode will launch your personally designated shortcut.  
Toassignyourshortcutkey:  
1. Press the navigation key left.  
2. Select an unassigned number and press Add (right softkey).  
3. Select your desired menu and press Assign (right softkey).  
Tousetheshortcutmenu:  
1. Press the navigation key left.  
2. Select the menu you want to use and press  
Toedittheshortcutname:  
.
1. Press the navigation key left.  
2. Select your desired menu and press Options (right softkey).  
3. Highlight EditName and press  
.
4. Edit the name and press OK (left softkey).  
5. Press Save (left softkey) to save the name.  
Tounassigntheshortcut:  
1. Press the navigation key left.  
2. Select your desired menu and press Options (right softkey).  
3. Highlight Unassign and press  
.
4. Select Yes and press  
.
Ⅲ
To unassign all shortcuts, select UnassignAll during step  
3 above.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AutoAnswer Mode  
You may set your phone to automatically pick up incoming calls in  
speakerphone mode or when connected to an optional hands-free  
car kit and headset (sold separately).  
TosetAutoAnswermode:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Others and press  
.
4. Select AutoAnswer and press  
.
5. Select CarKit/Headset or Speakerphone and press  
.
6. Select either 5Seconds or 15Seconds and press  
.
Ⅲ
To deactivate this feature, select Off during step 6 above.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Open/Close Flip Option  
This feature enables you to answer an incoming call by opening the  
flip or to end a call by closing the flip.  
ToactivatetheOpenFlipfeature:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Others and press  
.
4. Select Open/CloseFlip and press  
5. Select Open and press  
.
.
6. Select AnswerCall and press  
.
Ⅲ
To deactivate this feature, select NoAction during  
step 6 above.  
ToactivatetheCloseFlipfeature:  
1. Follow steps 1-4 above.  
2. Select Close and press . (You will see a message on the display.)  
3. Press OK (left softkey) to continue.  
4. Select an option from the following and press  
.
Ⅲ
End to end the call.  
Ⅲ
Continue(Mute) to continue the call. Your voice is muted,  
however you can hear the caller’s voice from the speaker.  
Ⅲ
Contin(Unmute) to continue the call. You can hear the caller’s  
voice and speak to the phone to answer.  
Note: The Close Flip feature does not apply during Ready Link calls or when you  
are using the speakerphone, a headset, or a car kit.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Any KeyAnswer  
This feature allows you to answer incoming calls by pressing  
any number keys and  
in addition to  
and  
.
Toactivatethisfeature:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Others and press  
.
4. Select AnyKeyAnswer and press  
.
5. Select On and press  
.
Ⅲ
To deactivate this feature, select Off during step 5 above.  
Setting the Side Key Guard  
This feature enables you to lock your side keys (  
,
,
, and  
the Side Camera key) while the flip is closed.  
Toactivatethisfeature:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Others and press  
.
4. Select SideKeyGuard and press  
.
5. Select On and press  
.
Ⅲ
KeyGuard appears on the Sub LCD while the flip is closed.  
Ⅲ
To deactivate this feature, select Off during step 5 above.  
Note: This feature does not apply when the flip is open.  
Tip: You can deactivate this feature temporarily to use side keys by pressing and  
holding  
while the clamshell is closed.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Abbreviated Dialing  
Abbreviated Dialing is another form of speed dialing. It allows you to  
dial a number by entering 3-6 digits of any number in your Contacts  
Directory. If the digits you enter do not match any stored Contacts  
entry, your phone will automatically prepend the digits you specify.  
Toactivatethisfeature:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Others and press  
.
4. Select Abbrev. Dial and press  
.
5. Select Ph. BookMatch and press  
.
6. Select Enable and press  
.
Tip: With the Phone Book match feature, your phone displays the Contact’s name  
and phone number if the incoming call or outgoing call is in your Contacts list.  
Tosetyourprependnumber:  
1. Follow steps 1-4 above.  
2. Select Prepend and press  
3. Select Enable and press  
4. Select Prepend# and press  
.
.
.
5. Enter a five- or six-digit number and press  
or OK (left softkey).  
Ⅲ
To deactivate this feature, highlight Disable during  
step 3 above.  
Tip: If you enter fewer than 5 digits, the display shows a warning message.  
Tip: To dial the prepend number, see “Using Abbreviated Dialing” on page 31.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Meeting Mode  
This feature allows you to hold an incoming call when you cannot  
answer immediately.  
TosettheMeetingmode:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Others and press  
.
4. Select MeetingMode and press  
.
5. Select On and press  
.
Ⅲ
Meeting appears above the softkeys in Meeting mode.  
Ⅲ
To deactivate this feature, select Off during step 5 above.  
Tip: Press and hold  
to set this feature in standby mode.  
TousetheMeetingmode:  
1. Press  
when you receive an incoming call.  
2. The caller hears a message to wait your answer.  
3. Press  
to answer the call.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Headset Mode  
This feature allows you hands-free phone use. Set the headset mode  
to Voice Call or Ready Link and press the Turbo Button (the operation  
button) on the headset to activate useful functions.  
Tosetheadsetmode:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Others and press  
.
4. Select HeadsetMode and press  
.
5. Select VoiceCall or ReadyLink and press  
.
Ⅲ
To deactivate this feature, select Off during step 5 above.  
Usingthephonewithheadsetmodeactivated:  
ⅷ
VoiceCall: Press the Turbo Button to activate ASR (Automatic  
Speech Recognition). Press twice to redial the last call. Press and  
hold the button to record a Voice Memo. (See page 123 for ASR.)  
ⅷ
ReadyLink: Press the Turbo Button to make a Ready Link call by  
using ASR (Automatic Speech Recognition). Press twice to redial  
the last Ready Link call. (See page 123 for ASR.)  
Note: If your headset doesn’t have a Turbo Button, set headset mode to Off.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Return to Standby Mode  
This feature allows you to select the way to return to standby mode.  
Tosetthisfeature:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Display and press  
.
4. Select ReturntoIdle and press  
.
5. A message appears. Press OK (left softkey) to continue.  
6. Select Automatically or EndKey and press  
.
Ⅲ
Automatically to return to standby mode automatically in 30  
seconds.  
Ⅲ
EndKey to return to standby mode by pressing  
.
Note: End Key setting affects the battery’s talk and standby times.  
Sleep Mode  
This feature helps conserve your battery power by restricting the  
display.  
Tosetsleepmode:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Display and press  
.
4. Select SleepMode and press  
.
5. Select MainLCD or SubLCD and press  
.
.
6. Select your desired option and press  
Ⅲ
To deactivate this feature, select Off during step 6 above.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Message Notification  
You can see an icon and/or a pop-up message notification when you  
receive a text message or voicemail while you are in Sprint PCS Vision  
applications, browser mode, or voice calls.  
Tosetmessagenotification:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Messaging and press  
.
4. Select Notification and press  
.
5. Select MsgsandIcon or IconOnly and press  
.
6. Press Save (left softkey).  
Editing Preset Messages  
Your phone can store pre-set messages for use with text messaging  
and email. You can edit your phone’s default preset messages  
through the Settings menu.  
Toedityourphone’spresetmessages:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Messaging and press  
.
4. Select PresetMsgs and press  
5. Select the message you want to edit and press  
6. Use your keypad to edit the message and press OK (left softkey)  
.
.
or  
to save your changes. (“Preset Msgs Saved” will display.)  
Ⅲ
To reset all messages, press Options (right softkey), select  
ResetAllMsgs, and press  
during step 5 above.  
Note: For information on editing text, see “Entering Text” on page 32.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting a Callback Number  
With this feature, you can notify your recipients of your callback  
number with the text message.  
Tosetthecallbacknumber:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Messaging and press  
.
4. Select SendCallback# and press  
.
5. Select an option from the following and press  
.
Ⅲ
None to send no callback number.  
Ⅲ
MyPhone# to send your phone number.  
Ⅲ
Other to send a specific callback number. To set a number,  
enter a phone number and press  
.
SettingYour Signature  
This feature allows you to send a message with your signature.  
Tosetyoursignature:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select Messaging and press  
4. Select Signature and press  
.
.
.
5. Press , select On, and press  
6. Select Text and press  
.
.
7. Enter your signature and press OK (left softkey).  
8. Press Save (left softkey) to save your signature.  
Note: You can put your set signature even when your signature setting is off.  
To put the signature, press Mode (right softkey) and select Signature while  
composing your message.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display Language  
You can choose to display your phone’s onscreen menus in English or  
in Spanish.  
Toassignalanguageforthephone’sdisplay:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select Others and press  
4. Select Language and press  
.
.
.
5. Select English or Español and press  
.
Using the Mini-Flashlight  
This function allows you to use the phone’s camera flash as a  
miniature flashlight. To use this function, your phone must be in  
standby mode with the Side Key Guard unlocked. (See page 59 for  
the Side Key Guard.)  
Tousetheminiflashlight:  
ᮣ
With the flip closed and in standby mode, press and hold the  
Side Volume key (  
). (The light flashes for 8 seconds.)  
Note: This function doesn’t apply when a Missed Call or Notification is displayed.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 2C  
Setting Your Phone’s Security  
In This Section  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
AccessingtheSecurityMenu  
UsingYourPhone’sLockFeature  
RestrictingCalls  
UsingSpecialNumbers  
ErasingtheContactsDirectory  
ErasingAllVoiceTags  
ErasingAllDownloads  
ResettingYourPicturesAccount  
ResettingYourPhone  
ResettingandLockingYourPhoneThroughSMS  
SM  
SecurityFeaturesforSprintPCSVision  
Byusingthesecuritysettingsonyourwirelessphone, youreceivepeace  
ofmindwithoutsacrificingflexibility. This section will familiarize you  
with your phone’s security settings. With several options available,  
you can customize your phone to meet your personal needs.  
Section 2C: Setting Your Phone’s Security  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessing the Security Menu  
All of your phone’s security settings are available through the  
Security menu. You must enter your lock code to view the  
Security menu.  
ToaccesstheSecuritymenu:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
.
3. Select Security and press  
4. Enter your lock code. (The Security menu is displayed.)  
Tip: If you can’t recall your lock code, try using the last four digits of either your  
Social Security number or phone number or try 0000. If none of these work, call  
TM  
Qwest Wireless Repair at 1-877-879-0611.  
UsingYour Phone’s Lock Features  
LockingYour Phone  
When your phone is locked, you can only receive incoming calls or  
make calls to 911 or special numbers.  
Tolockyourphone:  
1. From the Security menu (see “Accessing the Security Menu”  
above), select LockPhone and press  
2. Select LockNow or OnPower-up and press  
3. Depending on your preference, highlight either FullLock or  
.
.
Excp. Incom.Calls and press  
.
Ⅲ
FullLock: No phone calls can be made and only special  
numbers can be received. (You can still make a call to an  
Emergency number and special numbers.)  
Ⅲ
Excp. Incom.Calls: No phone calls can be made, however all  
incoming calls can be received. (You can still make a call to  
an Emergency number and special numbers.)  
Tip: If you want to cancel the “On Power-up” setting before turning the phone off,  
select Unlocked during step 2 above.  
Section 2C: Setting Your Phone’s Security  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UnlockingYour Phone  
Tounlockyourphone:  
1. Press Unlock (left softkey).  
2. Enter your lock code.  
Locking the Picture andVideo Menu  
With this feature, you must enter your lock code when you access the  
Picture and Video menu.  
TolockthePicturesmenu:  
1. From the Security Menu (see “Accessing the Security Menu” on  
page 68), select LockPic&Video and press  
.
2. Select LockNow and press  
.
Ⅲ
To deactivate this feature, select Unlocked during  
step 2 above.  
Locking Voice Calls  
With this feature, you will not be able to make or receive voice calls  
except 911.  
Tolockvoicecalls:  
1. From the Security Menu (see “Accessing the Security Menu” on  
page 68), select Others and press  
.
2. Select LockServices and press  
.
3. Select VoiceCalls and press  
.
4. Select Locked and press  
.
Ⅲ
To deactivate this feature, select Unlocked during  
step 4 above.  
Section 2C: Setting Your Phone’s Security  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locking Ready Link Calls  
With this feature, you will not be able to make or receive Ready Link  
calls.  
TolocktheReadyLinkcalls:  
1. From the Security Menu (see “Accessing the Security Menu” on  
page 68), select Others and press  
.
2. Select LockServices and press  
.
3. Select ReadyLink and press  
.
4. Select Locked and press  
.
Ⅲ
To deactivate this feature, select Unlocked during  
step 4 above.  
Tip: The Ready Link/Memo button (  
Link locked state.  
) will be used as a memo button in Ready  
Changing the Lock Code  
Tochangeyourlockcode:  
1. From the Security Menu display (see “Accessing the Security  
Menu” on page 68), select Others and press  
.
2. Select ChangeLock and press  
.
3. Enter a new lock code (“1234” for example).  
4. Reenter the new code.  
Calling in Lock Mode  
You can place calls to 911 and to your special numbers when in lock  
mode. (For information on special numbers, see “Using Special  
Numbers” on page 72.)  
Toplaceanoutgoingcallinlockmode:  
ᮣ
To call an Emergency number or special number, enter the  
phone number and press  
.
Section 2C: Setting Your Phone’s Security  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Restricting Calls  
There may be occasions when you want to limit the numbers your  
phone can call or from which it can receive calls. You can use the  
Restrict Calls setting to do just that. (The Restrict Calls setting does  
not apply to 911.)  
Torestrictcalls:  
1. From the Security Menu display (see “Accessing the Security  
Menu” on page 68), select Others and press  
2. Select LimitUse and press  
3. Select OutgoingCalls or IncomingCalls and press  
.
.
.
4. Select your desired option and press  
.
Ⅲ
AllowAll lets you make or receive all calls.  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
PhoneBookOnly lets you make or receive calls to or from  
Contacts entries, voicemail, or special numbers only.  
Special#sOnly lets you make or receive calls to or from three  
special numbers only. (See “Using Special Numbers” on  
page 72.)  
Note: Restricted incoming calls are forwarded to voicemail.  
Section 2C: Setting Your Phone’s Security  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Special Numbers  
Special numbers are important numbers that you have designated as  
being “always available.” You can call and receive calls from special  
numbers even if your phone is locked.  
You can save three special numbers in addition to your Contacts  
entries (the same number may be in both directories).  
Toaddorreplaceaspecialnumber:  
1. From the Security Menu display (see “Accessing the Security  
Menu” on page 68), select Others and press  
2. Select Special#s and press  
3. Select an entry number and press  
.
.
.
4. Enter your desired phone number and press  
.
– or –  
Press Options (right softkey), select FromPhoneBook or  
Voicemail, and press  
.
Toinsertpausesintoaspecialnumber:  
1. From step 4 above, enter a phone number and press Options  
(right softkey) for the options.  
2. Highlight HardPause, 2-Sec. Pause, or Hyphen and press  
3. Finish entering the rest of the numbers and press  
Note: Special Numbers cannot make or receive calls in voice call locked state.  
.
.
Section 2C: Setting Your Phone’s Security  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Erasing the Contacts Directory  
You can quickly and easily erase all of the contents of your  
Contacts Directory.  
ToeraseallthenamesandphonenumbersinyourContactsDirectory:  
1. From the Security Menu display (see “Accessing the Security  
Menu” on page 68), select ErasePh. Book and press  
2. If you’re sure you want to erase your Contacts, select Yes and  
press  
.
.
ErasingAll VoiceTags  
You can quickly and easily erase all voice tags you have recorded.  
Toerasethevoicetags:  
1. From the Security Menu display (see “Accessing the Security  
Menu” on page 68), select EraseVoiceTag and press  
2. If you’re sure you want to erase the voice tags, select Yes and  
press  
.
.
ErasingAll Downloads  
ToerasealldatadownloadedfromtheWeb:  
1. From the Security Menu display (see “Accessing the Security  
Menu” on page 68), select EraseDownload and press  
.
2. If you’re sure you want to erase all data downloaded from the  
Web, select Yes and press  
.
Ⅲ
If you have assigned downloaded data, the function returns  
to its default setting.  
Section 2C: Setting Your Phone’s Security  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ResettingYour PicturesAccount  
This option resets your authentication ID for your Sprint PCS  
Picture Mail account.  
Toresetyourpicturesaccount:  
1. From the Security Menu display (see “Accessing the Security  
Menu” on page 68), select ResetPictures and press  
2. If you’re sure you want to reset your pictures account, select Yes  
and press  
.
.
After resetting, you are prompted to reenter the password when you  
use Online Pictures.  
Note: Your account will be locked if you enter wrong password 10 times after  
TM  
resetting your acount. In this case, please contact Qwest Wireless Repair.  
ResettingYour Phone  
Resetting the phone restores all the factory defaults, including the  
ringer types and display settings. The Contacts, Call History,  
Scheduler, and Messaging are not affected.  
Toresetyourphone:  
1. From the Security Menu display (see “Accessing the Security  
Menu” on page 68), select ResetPhone and press  
2. If you’re sure you want to reset your phone, select Yes and  
press  
.
.
Section 2C: Setting Your Phone’s Security  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SM  
Security Features for Sprint PCSVision  
Enabling and Disabling Sprint PCSVision Services  
You can disable Sprint PCS Vision services without turning off your  
phone; however, you will not have access to all Sprint PCS Vision  
services, including Web and Email. Disabling Sprint PCS Vision will  
avoid any charges associated with Sprint PCS Vision services. While  
signed out, you can still place or receive phone calls, check  
voicemail, and use other voice services. You may enable Sprint PCS  
Vision services again at any time.  
TodisableSprintPCSVisionservices:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select PCSVision and press  
.
4. Select DisableVision and press . (A message will appear.)  
5. Press Disable (right softkey) to confirm that you want to sign out.  
ToenableSprintPCSVisionservices:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select PCSVision and press  
.
4. Select EnableVision and press  
5. Press OK (left softkey) to sign in.  
.
Section 2C: Setting Your Phone’s Security  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 2D  
Controlling Your Roaming Experience  
In This Section  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
UnderstandingRoaming  
SettingYourPhone’sRoamMode  
UsingCallGuard  
Roamingistheabilitytomakeorreceivecallswhenyou’reoffthe  
networkprovidedtoyou. Your new dual-band/tri-mode wireless  
phone works anywhere on the network provided to you and  
allows you to roam on other analog and 1900 and 800 MHz digital  
networks whereroaming agreements have been implemented with  
other carriers.  
This section explains how roaming works as well as special features  
that let you manage your roaming experience.  
Section 2D: Controlling Your Roaming Experience  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding Roaming  
RecognizingIconsontheDisplayScreen  
Your phone’s display screen always lets you know when you’re off  
the network provided to you and whether your phone is operating in  
analog or digital mode. The following chart indicates what you’ll see  
depending on where you’re using your phone.  
Main LCD/Sub LCD  
Roaming Indicator  
Analog Indicator  
Provided Network  
Other Digital Networks  
Digital Roam  
Analog Networks  
Analog Roam  
Tip: Remember, when you are using your phone off the network provided to you,  
always dial numbers using 11 digits (1 + area code + number).  
Note: You will pay a higher per-minute rate for roaming calls.  
RoamingonOtherDigitalNetworks  
When you’re roaming on digital networks, your call quality and  
security will be similar to the quality you receive when making calls  
on the network provided to you. However, you may not be able to  
access certain features, such as Sprint PCS Vision.  
Note: Ready Link Service is not available in roaming areas.  
Section 2D: Controlling Your Roaming Experience  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RoamingonAnalogNetworks  
When you roam on analog networks, you will experience a similar  
quality provided by other analog carriers today. Although some  
features, such as Sprint PCS Vision and Ready Link, will be  
unavailable, you can still make and receive calls and access voicemail.  
If you are accustomed to network service, you may notice some of  
the following differences when using analog service:  
ⅷ
You are more likely to experience static, cross-talk, fade-out, and  
dropped calls.  
ⅷ
Some features which are standard on the network provided to  
you, such as call waiting, Sprint PCS Vision, Ready Link, and direct  
international dialing, may not be available.  
ⅷ
Though callers can leave voicemail messages while you are  
roaming, you may not receive notification until you return to the  
network provided to you. (See “Checking for Voicemail Messages  
While Roaming” on page 79.)  
ⅷ
There are security and privacy risks (eavesdropping and cloning)  
that exist with conventional analog services today.  
ⅷ
Your battery’s charge will deplete more quickly and you will need  
to recharge it more often when you use your phone for analog  
roaming.  
Note: If you’re on a call when you leave the network provided to you and enter an  
area where roaming is available (whether digital or analog), your call is dropped.  
If your call is dropped in an area where you think network service is available,  
turn your phone off and on again to reconnect to the network provided to you.  
Note: When using your phone in analog mode, the phone may feel warm. This is  
normal for analog operation.  
Section 2D: Controlling Your Roaming Experience  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CheckingforVoicemailMessagesWhileRoaming  
When you are roaming off the network provided to you, you may not  
receive on-phone notification of new voicemail messages. Callers  
can still leave messages, but you will need to periodically check your  
voicemail for new messages if you are in a roaming service area for an  
extended period of time.  
Tocheckyourvoicemailwhileroaming:  
ᮣ
Dial 1+area code+your wireless phone number.  
When you return to the network provided to you, voicemail  
notification will resume as normal.  
SettingYour Phone’s Roam Mode  
Your phone allows you to control your roaming capabilities. By using  
the Roaming menu option, you can determine which signals your  
phone accepts.  
SetMode  
Choose from three different settings on your dual-band/tri-mode  
phone to control your roaming experience.  
Tosetyourphone’sroammode:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select Roaming and press  
4. Select SetMode and press  
.
.
.
5. Select an option from the following and press  
.
Ⅲ
Digital allows you to access the network provided to you  
only and prevents roaming on other networks.  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
Automatic seeks network service. When network service is  
unavailable, the phone searches for an alternate system.  
Analog forces the phone to seek an analog roaming system.  
The previous setting (Digital or Automatic) is restored the  
next time the phone is turned on.  
Section 2D: Controlling Your Roaming Experience  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UsingCallGuard  
Your phone has two ways of alerting you when you are roaming off  
the network provided to you: the onscreen roaming icon and Call  
Guard. Call Guard makes it easy to manage your roaming charges by  
requiring an extra step before you can place or answer a roaming call.  
(This additional step is not required when you make or receive calls  
while on the network provided to you.)  
ToturnCallGuardonoroff:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select Roaming and press  
4. Select CallGuard and press  
5. Select On or Off and press  
.
.
.
.
ToplaceroamingcallswithCallGuardon:  
1. From standby mode, dial 1 + area code + the seven-digit  
number. (You can also initiate a call from the Contacts directory,  
Call History, or Messaging.)  
2. Press  
or  
(or press Options [right softkey] and  
highlight Call or Call:SpeakerOn) and press  
.
3. Press  
to proceed while the pop-up message is displayed.  
– or –  
Press any key to erase the pop-up message, press Options (right  
softkey), highlight RoamCall, or Roam:SpeakerOn, and press  
.
ToanswerincomingroamingcallswithCallGuardon:  
ᮣ
Press Options (right softkey), highlight Answer or  
Answer:Speaker, and press  
.
– or –  
1. Press  
or  
.
2. Press  
to proceed while the pop-up message is displayed.  
Reminder: If the Call Guard feature is set to On, you need to take extra steps to  
make and receive roaming calls, even if you have selected the Analog setting  
(see page 79).  
Section 2D: Controlling Your Roaming Experience  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 2E  
Navigating Through Menus  
In This Section  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
MenuNavigation  
MenuStructure  
ViewingtheMenus  
EveryfunctionandfeatureofyourSanyoSCP-7400canbeaccessed  
throughanonscreenmenu. This section is a road map to using your  
wireless phone. Please take a few moments to learn your way  
around and you’ll find your phone easier to use.  
Section 2E: Navigating Through Menus  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu Navigation  
The navigation key on your wireless phone allows you to scroll  
through menus quickly and easily. The scroll bar at the right of the  
menu keeps track of your position in the menu at all times.  
To navigate through a menu, simply press the navigation key up  
or down.  
Menu Structure  
SelectingMenuItems  
As you navigate through the menu, menu options are highlighted.  
Select any numbered option by simply pressing the corresponding  
number on the phone’s keypad. You may also select any item by  
highlighting it and pressing  
Forexample,ifyouwanttoviewyourlastincomingcall:  
1. Press to access the main menu.  
2. Select CallHistory by pressing . (It may already be highlighted.)  
3. Select Incoming by pressing or by highlighting it and  
.
pressing . (If you have received any calls, they are displayed  
on the screen.)  
BackingUpWithinaMenu  
Togotothepreviousmenu:  
ᮣ
Press  
.
Toreturntostandbymode:  
ᮣ
Press  
.
Shortcuts  
Use your navigation key to quickly access your phone’s menus.  
ⅷ
Right to take a shortcut to the Contacts menu.  
ⅷ
Left to take a shortcut to the MyShortcut menu. (See page 56 for  
setting.)  
ⅷ
Up to take a shortcut to the Messaging menu.  
ⅷ
Down to take a shortcut to the Downloads menu.  
Section 2E: Navigating Through Menus  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewing the Menus  
MenuDiagram  
The following list outlines your phone’s menu structure.  
1. Call History  
1. Outgoing  
2. Incoming  
3. Missed  
4. Erase History  
2. Contacts  
1. Find/Add Entry  
2. Speed Dial #s  
3. My Phone#  
4. Services  
3. Messaging  
1. Send Message  
2. PictureMail  
3. Text Msgs  
4. Instant Msg.  
5. Voicemail  
4. Web  
5. Picture&Video  
1. Camera  
2. Camcorder  
3. My Pictures  
4. My Videos  
5. Online Albums  
6. Account Info  
7. Wap Link 1-3 (if applicable)  
6. Downloads  
1. Games  
2. Ringers  
3. Screen Savers  
4. Applications  
5. Dynamic 1-10 (If applicable)  
6. Others (If applicable)  
7. Media Player  
Section 2E: Navigating Through Menus  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Settings  
1. Sounds  
1. Ringer/Key Vol.  
2. Ringer Type  
3. Alerts  
4. Receiver Vol.  
5. Application Vol.  
6. Others  
2. Display  
1. Backlight  
2. Greeting  
3. Font Size  
4. Background  
5. Animation  
6. Incoming Calls  
7. Match Area Code  
8. Standby Display  
9. Main Menu  
10.My Buddy  
11.Return to Idle  
12.Sleep Mode  
3. PCS Vision  
1. Enable (or Disable) Vision  
2. Net Guard  
3. Update Profile  
4. Ready Link  
1. Enable/Disable  
2. List Update  
3. Sounds  
4. Speakerphone  
5. Default View  
6. Floor Display  
7. R-Link Guard  
8. Restart  
9. Help  
5. Location  
6. Roaming  
1. Set Mode  
2. Call Guard  
7. Messaging  
1. Notification  
2. Preset Msgs  
3. Send Callback#  
4. Signature  
Section 2E: Navigating Through Menus  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Security  
1. Lock Phone  
2. Lock Pic&Video  
3. Erase Ph. Book  
4. Erase VoiceTag  
5. Erase Download  
6. Reset Pictures  
7. Reset Phone  
8. Others  
9. Others  
1. Any Key Answer  
2. Auto Answer  
3. Open/Close Flip  
4. Abbrev. Dial  
5. Headset Mode  
6. TTY  
7. Side Key Guard  
8. Meeting Mode  
9. Airplane Mode  
10.Language  
0. Phone Info  
1. Phone#/User ID  
2. Help  
3. Version  
4. Advanced  
9. Tools/Extras  
1. Voice Services  
1. Voice Memo  
2. Screen Call  
2. Calendar  
3. Alarm Clock  
4. Calculator  
5. World Clock  
6. PC Sync  
1. Ringers  
2. Images  
3. Erase Data  
Section 2E: Navigating Through Menus  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 2F  
Managing Call History  
In This Section  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ViewingHistory  
CallHistoryOptions  
MakingaCallFromCallHistory  
SavingaPhoneNumberFromCallHistory  
PrependingaPhoneNumberFromCallHistory  
ErasingCallHistory  
TheCallHistorykeepstrackofincomingcalls, callsmadefromyour  
wirelessphone, andmissedcalls. This section guides you through  
accessing and making the most of your Call History.  
Section 2F: Managing Call History  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewing History  
You’ll find the Call History feature very helpful. They are lists of the  
last 20 voice calls and the last 10 Ready Link calls that you placed,  
accepted, or missed. Call History makes redialing a number fast and  
easy. It is continually updated as new numbers are added to the  
beginning of the list and the oldest entries are removed from the  
bottom of the list.  
Each entry contains the phone number (if it is available) and  
contact’s name (if the phone number is in your Contacts List).  
Duplicate calls (same number and type of call) may only appear once  
on the list.  
ToviewaCallHistoryentry:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select CallHistory and press  
.
3. Select Outgoing, Incoming, or Missed and press . (The selected  
Call History list will display.)  
Tip: You can switch the voice call history to the Ready Link call history by pressing  
R-Link (left softkey). To return to the voice call history, press Voice Call (left softkey).  
This option is not available when Ready Link mode is set to Disable (see page 138),  
or Ready Link is locked (see page 70).  
Section 2F: Managing Call History  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Call History Options  
For additional information and options on a particular call, highlight  
a Call History entry and press Options (right softkey).  
ⅷ
Call to dial the phone number.  
ⅷ
Call:SpeakerOn to dial the phone number in speakerphone mode.  
ⅷ
SendMessage to send a text message, picture, or video.  
(See page 227 or 183 for details.)  
ⅷ
SavePhone# to save the phone number (if applicable).  
Ⅲ
GotoPhoneBook appears when the number is already in  
your Contacts list. (See “Saving a Phone Number From Call  
History” on page 89.)  
ⅷ
Prepend to add numbers to the beginning of the phone number.  
(See “Prepending a Phone Number From Call History” on  
page 90.)  
ⅷ
CopytoPersonal to copy the phone number to the Ready Link  
Personal List. (Only appears when Ready Link mode is set to  
Enable and the number does not match any stored entry in your  
Personal List.)  
ⅷ
Erase to erase the entry.  
Making a Call From Call History  
ToplaceacallfromCallHistory:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select CallHistory and press  
.
3. Select Outgoing, Incoming or Missed and press  
.
4. Scroll to the entry you want to call.  
5. Press  
or  
.
– or –  
Press Options (right softkey), highlight Call or Call:SpeakerOn,  
and press  
.
Note: You cannot make calls from Call History to entries identified as No ID or  
Restricted.  
Section 2F: Managing Call History  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving a Phone Number From Call History  
Your phone can store up to 500 phone numbers in up to 300  
Contacts entries (an entry may contain up to seven numbers). Each  
entry’s name can contain sixteen characters.  
TosaveaphonenumberfromCallHistory:  
1. Scroll to the call history entry you want to save.  
2. Press Options (right softkey) to display the options.  
3. Highlight SavePhone# and press  
4. Select the appropriate label (Mobile, Home, Work, Pager, Fax,  
Other, or No Label) and press  
.
.
5. Enter a name and press . If you have already stored entries in  
the Contacts list, you are prompted to select the following entry  
mode:  
Ⅲ
NewName to enter a name directly.  
Ⅲ
FromPh. Book to select a name from the Contacts list.  
6. Press Save (left softkey).  
Note: You cannot save phone numbers already in your Contacts list or from calls  
identified as No ID or Restricted. If the selected entry has already been stored in  
the Contacts list, Go to Phone Book appears during step 3 above.  
Section 2F: Managing Call History  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PrependingaPhoneNumberFromCallHistory  
If you need to place a call from Call History and you happen to be  
outside your local area code, you can add the appropriate prefix by  
prepending the number.  
ToprependaphonenumberfromCallHistory:  
1. Scroll to a call history entry and press Options (right softkey).  
2. Highlight Prepend and press  
3. Enter the digits you want to add to the number.  
4. Press or to place a call.  
To select another option, press Options (right softkey), highlight it  
.
and press  
.
ⅷ
Call to dial the phone number.  
ⅷ
ⅷ
Call:SpeakerOn to dial the phone number in speakerphone mode.  
SavePhone# to store the phone number in your Contacts  
directory.  
ⅷ
ⅷ
H
T
HardPause to insert a hard pause.  
2-Sec. Pause to insert a 2-second pause.  
Erasing Call History  
To erase individual Call History entries, see “Call History Options” on  
page 88.  
ToeraseCallHistory:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select CallHistory and press  
.
3. Select EraseHistory and press  
.
4. Select Outgoing, Incoming, Missed, or All and press  
.
5. Select VoiceCalls or ReadyLink and press  
.
Ⅲ
VoiceCalls to erase call history for voice calls.  
Ⅲ
ReadyLink to erase call history for Ready Link calls.  
6. Select Yes and press  
.
Section 2F: Managing Call History  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 2G  
Using the Contacts Directory  
In This Section  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
DisplayingtheContactsList  
AddingaNewContactsEntry  
FindingContactsListEntries  
ContactsListEntryOptions  
AddingaPhoneNumbertoaContactsEntry  
EditingaContactsEntry’sPhoneNumber  
ErasingaContactsEntryFromtheList  
AssigningSpeedDialNumbers  
EditingaContactsEntry  
SelectingaRingerandImageTypeforan Entry  
SecretContactsEntries  
Nowthatyouknowthebasicsthatmakeiteasiertostayintouchwith  
peopleandinformation, you’rereadytoexploreyourphone’smore  
advancedfeatures. This section explains how to use your phone’s  
Contacts Directory and helps you make the most of your contacts  
and time when you are trying to connect with the important  
people in your life.  
Section 2G: Using the Contacts Directory  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displaying the Contacts List  
Todisplayyourcontactslist:  
ᮣ
Press the navigation key right.  
– or –  
1. Press  
2. Select Contacts and press  
3. Select Find/AddEntry and press  
to access the main menu.  
.
.
Adding a New Contacts Entry  
Your phone can store up to 500 phone numbers in up to 300  
Contacts entries (an entry may contain up to seven numbers). Each  
entry’s name can contain sixteen characters.  
Toaddanewentry:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Contacts and press  
.
3. Select Find/AddEntry and press  
.
Ⅲ
Press the navigation key right for the shortcut (steps 1 to 3).  
4. Highlight <AddContact> and press  
5. Enter a name and press  
6. Select a label by using your navigation key and press  
.
.
.
7. Enter the phone number or address and press  
8. Press Save (left softkey).  
– or –  
.
1. Press the navigation key right to display the Contacts list.  
2. Highlight an entry and press Options (right softkey).  
3. Highlight AddContact and press  
.
4. Follow steps 5-8 above.  
Tip: You can also add a new Contacts entry by entering a number from standby  
mode. See “Saving a Phone Number” on page 28.  
Section 2G: Using the Contacts Directory  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Finding Contacts List Entries  
There are several ways to display your Contacts entries: by name, by  
speed dial number, by group, and by voice tags. Follow the steps  
outlined in the sections below to display entries from the Contacts  
list menu.  
FindingNames  
TofindContactslistentriesbyname:  
1. Press the navigation key right to display the Contacts list.  
2. Scroll to the desired entry in the Contacts list.  
– or –  
Enter the first letter of the name or part of the name. (The  
display shows the entries beginning with the letter entered.)  
3. Press  
to display the entry’s details.  
TofindReadyLinkListentries:  
1. Press the navigation key right to display your Contacts list.  
2. Press Goto (left softkey). Highlight your desired list and press  
.
Ⅲ
PhoneBook to display the Contacts list.  
Ⅲ
PersonalList to display the Personal List.  
Ⅲ
PersonalGrps. to display the Personal Group List.  
3. Scroll through the list to select your desired entry.  
Note: The Go to (left softkey) option does not appear when Ready Link mode is set  
to Disable (see page 138), or Ready Link is locked (see page 70).  
Section 2G: Using the Contacts Directory  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FindingSpeedDialNumbers  
Tofindphonenumbersyouhavestoredinspeeddiallocations:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Contacts and press  
.
3. Select SpeedDial#s and press . (The Speed Dial numbers list  
appears.)  
FindingVoiceTags  
TofindVoiceTagsinyourphone:  
1. Press and hold  
or  
.
2. You’ll hear a tone followed by the prompt. Say “Edit Voice Tag.”  
3. After the prompt, say “Review List.” (The list of Voice tags  
appears.)  
Contacts List Entry Options  
To access a contact’s options, display the Contacts list, highlight an  
entry and press . Then select a phone number and press Options  
(right softkey). To select an option, highlight it and press  
.
ⅷ
Edit to edit the selected entry.  
ⅷ
Call to dial the selected number.  
ⅷ
Call:SpeakerOn to dial the phone number in speakerphone mode.  
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
SendMessage to send a text message, picture, or video (mobile  
numbers only). (See page 227 and 183 for details.)  
CallAlarm to set a call alarm for the entry. (See page 104 for Call  
Alarm.)  
SetSpeedDial to assign speed dial numbers to your favorite  
entries. (See “Assigning Speed Dial Numbers” on page 96.)  
Prepend to alter a phone number by adding numbers to the  
beginning of the entry. (See “Prepending a Phone Number From  
Call History” on page 90.)  
ⅷ
CopytoPersonal to copy the phone number to your Ready Link  
Personal List. (Only appears when Ready Link mode is set to  
Enable and the number does not match any stored entry in your  
Personal List.)  
Section 2G: Using the Contacts Directory  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding a Phone Number to a Contacts Entry  
Toaddaphonenumbertoanentry:  
1. Press the navigation key right to display the Contacts list.  
2. Scroll to the entry you wish to add and press  
3. Select a phone number, press Options (right softkey), highlight  
Edit, and press  
4. Select the label field you want to add and press  
.
.
.
5. Enter the number and press  
.
6. Press Save (left softkey).  
Editing a Contacts Entry’s Phone Number  
Toeditanentry’sphonenumber:  
1. Press the navigation key right.  
2. Scroll to the entry you wish to edit and press  
3. Select a phone number, press Options (right softkey), highlight  
Edit, and press  
.
.
4. Select the number you want to edit and press  
5. Edit the entry by using your keypad and press  
6. Press Save (left softkey) to save your changes.  
.
.
Erasing a Contacts Entry From the List  
Toerasetheselectedentry:  
1. Press the navigation key right.  
2. Scroll to the entry you wish to delete by using the navigation  
key and press Options (right softkey).  
3. Highlight EraseContact and press  
4. Select Yes and press  
.
.
Section 2G: Using the Contacts Directory  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Assigning Speed Dial Numbers  
With this feature you can dial Contacts Directory entries with one  
key press for locations 2-9. Save your memory locations 2-9 for speed  
dialing your most commonly used phone numbers. Speed Dial  
numbers must be stored in your Contacts Directory to use this feature.  
ToassignSpeedDial:  
1. Press  
2. Select Contacts and press  
3. Select SpeedDial#s and press  
4. To select a corresponding speed dial number from 2-9,  
highlight an unassigned number and press  
5. Select an entry from the list and press  
6. Select the phone number you want to set as a speed dial and  
to access the main menu.  
.
.
.
.
press  
.
– or –  
1. Press the navigation key right.  
2. Scroll to your desired entry in the Contacts list and press  
.
3. Select the phone number you want to set as a speed dial and  
press Options (right softkey).  
4. Highlight SetSpeedDial and press  
.
5. Select an unassigned number and press  
.
Tip: When you highlight an assigned number and press , you’ll be asked  
whether you want to overwrite the assigned number. Select Yes to overwrite or  
No to cancel.  
Section 2G: Using the Contacts Directory  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tocancelastoredspeeddialnumber:  
1. Press to access the main menu.  
2. Select Contacts and press  
3. Select SpeedDial#s and press  
4. Select the stored speed dial number you want to cancel and  
press  
.
.
.
5. Select Unassign and press  
.
TouseSpeedDial:  
ᮣ
From standby mode, just press and hold the appropriate key.  
Editing a Contacts Entry  
Tomakechangestoanentry:  
1. Press the navigation key right.  
2. Scroll to the entry you wish to edit and press  
.
3. Select a phone number, press Options (right softkey), highlight  
Edit, and press  
.
– or –  
Select an email address or Web address and press Edit (right  
softkey).  
4. Select the field you want to edit and press  
.
5. Edit the entry by using your keypad and press  
.
6. Press Save (left softkey) to save your changes.  
Section 2G: Using the Contacts Directory  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SelectingaRingerandImageTypeforanEntry  
You can assign a ringer or an image type to a Contacts entry so you can  
identify the caller by the ringer or image type. (See “Ringer Types” on  
page 38.)  
Toselectaringertypeforanentry:  
1. Press the navigation key right.  
2. Select the entry for which you want to set the incoming ringer  
and press  
.
3. Select a phone number, press Options (right softkey), highlight  
Edit, and press  
.
– or –  
Select an email address or Web address and press Edit (right  
softkey).  
4. Scroll to Ringer and press  
.
5. Scroll to your desired ringer and press . (When you highlight  
a ringer type, a sample ringer will sound.)  
6. Press Save (left softkey) to save the ringer type.  
Ⅲ
To confirm the ringer, highlight Ringer and press Play (right  
softkey).  
Toselectanimagetypeforanentry:  
1. Follow steps 1-3 above.  
2. Scroll to PictureID and press  
.
3. Scroll to your desired image and press  
.
4. Press Save (left softkey) to save the image type.  
Ⅲ
To see a display preview of an image, press Preview (right  
softkey) during step 4 above. Press the right softkey to  
switch between Main/Sub LCD’s display preview.  
Note: If you set an animation ringer (indicated with the  
icon) and an image,  
your phone plays the ringer (audio) of the animation ringer and displays the  
image you selected.  
Section 2G: Using the Contacts Directory  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Secret Contacts Entries  
You can hide an entry’s phone number(s) and require your lock code  
to edit the entry by making it secret. The entry name is still displayed,  
but the entry’s phone numbers are replaced with “<Secret>”.  
Tomakeanentrysecret:  
1. Press the navigation key right.  
2. Scroll to the Contacts entry you want to tag as secret.  
3. Press Options (right softkey) to display the menu options.  
4. Highlight SetSecret and press  
.
5. Enter the 4-digit lock code.  
6. Select On and press  
.
Tomakeanentrypublic:  
1. Press the navigation key right.  
2. Scroll to the Contacts entry you want to tag as public.  
3. Press Options (right softkey) to display the menu options.  
4. Highlight SetSecret and press  
.
5. Enter the 4-digit lock code.  
6. Select Off and press  
.
Tip: If you can’t recall your lock code, try using the last four digits of either your  
Social Security number or phone number or try 0000. If none of these work, call  
TM  
Qwest Wireless Repair at 1-877-879-0611.  
Section 2G: Using the Contacts Directory  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 2H  
Personal Organizer  
In This Section  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ManagingtheScheduler  
UsingYourPhone’sScheduler  
UsingtheCallAlarmFeature  
UsingtheToDoList  
PurgingAllEvents, CallAlarms, orToDoListItems  
PersonalInformationManagement  
UsingYourPhone’sTools  
DownloadingFiles  
YourSanyoSCP-7400Phoneisequippedwithseveralpersonal  
informationmanagementfeaturesthathelpyoumanageyourbusy  
lifestyle. This section shows you how to use these features to turn  
your phone into a time management planner that helps you keep  
up with your contacts, schedules, and commitments. It takes  
productivity to a whole new level.  
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Managing the Scheduler  
Use the Calendar to remind you of events or important calls you need  
to make. You can schedule up to 100 events, 15 Call Alarms, and  
20 To-Do List items.  
DisplayingYour Calendar  
Todisplayyourcalendar:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Tools/Extras and press  
.
3. Select Calendar and press  
.
Note: In a no-service area or an analog service area, it’s necessary to set the  
actual time and date to use the Calendar function after removing and installing  
your battery. Set the current Time/Date by using numeric keys and/or the  
navigation key (Right/Left: move cursor, Up/Down: change value). You can set  
any time from 12:00 AM, Jan 1, 2000 to 11:59 PM, Dec 31, 2099.  
Setting Holidays  
You can set your personal holidays by displaying the date in red on  
the Calendar display. The default holidays displayed in red are  
Sundays and national holidays.  
Note: You can set holidays from Jan 1, 2000 to Dec 31, 2020.  
Tosetpersonalholidays:  
1. From the Calendar display, highlight the day you want to set to  
the holiday by using the navigation key.  
2. Press Options (right softkey), highlight Holiday, and press  
.
3. Highlight SetDate or SetWeekly from the options and press  
.
Ⅲ
SetDate sets the selected date for the holiday.  
Ⅲ
SetWeekly sets weekly holidays.  
Ⅲ
ResetDate resets the holiday setting for the selected date.  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
ResetWeekly resets the weekly holiday setting.  
ResetAll resets all the holiday settings and returns to the  
default settings.  
Tip: If you selected Set Weekly, Reset Weekly, or Reset All, you’ll be prompted to  
select Yes or No.  
Tip: The current day is framed by a rectangle.  
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UsingYour Phone’s Scheduler  
Adding an Event to the Scheduler  
Your Scheduler helps organize your time and reminds you of  
important events (up to 100 events).  
Toaddanevent:  
1. From the Calendar display (see page 101), select the day you  
want to add an event and press Options (right softkey).  
2. Highlight AddEvent and press  
3. Select Schedule and press  
.
.
4. Enter the description using your keypad and press  
press Mode [right softkey] to select a description from  
“From To Do List”).  
(or  
Note: The “From To Do List ”option will not appear if there are no items stored in  
the To Do List. See “Adding To Do List Items” on page 107 for details.  
5. Select the following items and press  
.
Ⅲ
Description to enter a description of your event (up to 14  
characters).  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
From to schedule the start time.  
To to schedule the end time.  
Location to edit the location of your event (up to 14  
characters).  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
Alarm to select your desired ringer.  
AlarmTime to edit the alarm time (number of hours or  
minutes before the event starts). Default alarm time is 10  
minutes before.  
Ⅲ
Repeat to set the event’s repeating status. Select None, Daily,  
Weekly, Monthly, or Yearly.  
6. Press Save (left softkey) to schedule the event.  
Tip: The date you have scheduled events for is indicated by “ ”.  
Tip: Press the navigation key up or down to scroll by week through the Scheduler  
calendar and the Side Volume key to scroll by month.  
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Alerts  
There are several ways your phone alerts you of scheduled events:  
ⅷ
By playing the alert tone (depending on the Ringer Type and  
Ringer Volume setting).  
ⅷ
By blinking the LED.  
ⅷ
By displaying the event’s description on the Main LCD when the  
flip is open.  
ⅷ
By displaying the event’s description on the Sub LCD when the  
flip is closed.  
ⅷ
By lighting the LCD backlight (depending on the backlight setting).  
EventAlert Menu  
When you have an event alarm scheduled, your phone alerts you and  
displays the icon, and the event summary.  
Torespondtoaneventalert:  
ᮣ
Press  
– or –  
to see the event details.  
ᮣ
ᮣ
Press Snooze (left softkey) to repeat the alarm in ten minutes.  
– or –  
Press Dismiss (right softkey) to dismiss the event and back to  
standby mode.  
Note: If you press  
appears in standby mode. Press Events (right softkey) to display the event and  
press to see the event details.  
before checking your event, Events (right softkey)  
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the CallAlarm Feature  
Adding a CallAlarm to the Scheduler  
You can set call alarms to notify you when you need to place a call.  
The call alarm will let you know when and to whom to place a  
scheduled call. You can set up to 15 call alarms.  
ToaddacallalarmtotheScheduler:  
1. From the Calendar display (see page 101), select the day you  
want to add an event and press Options (right softkey).  
2. Select AddEvent and press  
.
3. Select CallAlarm and press  
.
4. Enter the phone number directly or press Options (right softkey)  
for options.  
Ⅲ
FromPhoneBook to select the desired number from your  
Contacts list.  
Ⅲ
Voicemail to select the number for voicemail access.  
5. Select the following items and press  
.
Ⅲ
Time/Date to edit the start time and date.  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
Alarm to select the ringer alarm.  
Repeat to set the Call Alarm’s repeat status. Select None,  
Daily, Weekly, Monthly, or Yearly.  
6. Press Save (left softkey).  
Tip: You can also add a call alarm from the Contacts menu (see “Contacts List  
Entry Options” on page 94).  
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CallAlarm Alerts  
There are several ways your phone alerts you of a scheduled call  
alarm:  
ⅷ
By playing the alert tone (depending on the Ringer Type and  
Ringer Volume setting).  
ⅷ
By blinking the LED.  
ⅷ
By displaying the call alarm notification on the Main LCD when  
the flip is open.  
ⅷ
By displaying the call alarm notification on the Sub LCD when the  
flip is closed.  
ⅷ
By lighting the LCD backlight (depending on the backlight setting).  
CallAlarm Menu  
When you have scheduled a call alarm, your phone alerts you and  
displays the icon, the name, or phone number you wish to call.  
Torespondtoacallalarm:  
ᮣ
Press  
– or –  
Press  
– or –  
Press  
– or –  
or  
to dial the phone number.  
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
to make a Ready Link call (if applicable).  
to see the event details.  
Press Snooze (left softkey) to repeat the alarm.  
– or –  
Press Dismiss (right softkey) to dismiss the call alarm and back  
to standby mode.  
Note: If you press  
appears in standby mode. Press Events (right softkey) to display the event and  
press to see the call alarm details.  
before checking your event, Events (right softkey)  
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing an Event or CallAlarm  
Toeditaneventorcallalarm:  
1. From the Calendar display (see page 101), select the date for  
which you set events and press  
.
2. Select one of the events or call alarms and press . (The event  
or call alarm details appear.)  
3. Select the box you want to edit and press  
4. Enter or select a new setting and press  
5. Press Save (left softkey).  
.
.
Viewing a Future or Past Day’s Scheduled Events  
Toviewafutureorpastday’sscheduledevents:  
1. From the Calendar display (see page 101), press Options (right  
softkey).  
2. Highlight GoToDate and press  
.
3. Enter the date by using numeric keys and the navigation key  
and press  
4. Press  
or OK (left softkey).  
once again to view the day’s event list.  
Erasing a Day’s Events or CallAlarms  
Toeraseascheduledday’seventsorcallalarms:  
1. From the Calendar display (see page 101), select the date for  
which you set events and press  
.
2. Select one of the events or call alarms and press Options (right  
softkey).  
3. Highlight EraseEvent and press  
4. Select Yes and press  
.
.
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using theTo Do List  
Adding To Do List Items  
Your phone can store and manage up to 20 To Do List items.  
ToaddanitemtoyourToDoList:  
1. From the Calendar display (see page 101), press Options (right  
softkey).  
2. Highlight ToDoList and press  
3. Press Options (right softkey).  
4. Highlight AddItem and press  
.
.
5. Enter the description (up to 14 characters) and press  
.
6. Select Priority and press to edit the To Do’s priority.  
You can select from Normal, Urgent, or Done.  
7. Press Save (left softkey).  
Viewing theTo Do List  
ToviewyourToDoList:  
1. From the Calendar display (see page 101), press Options (right  
softkey).  
2. Highlight ToDoList and press  
.
Ⅲ
To see the details of each To Do List item, select an item and  
press  
.
EditingTo Do List Items  
ToeditaToDoListitem:  
1. From the To Do List display, highlight the item you want to edit  
and press  
.
2. Select the box you want to edit and press  
.
3. Edit the description or change the priority and press  
.
4. Press Save (left softkey).  
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding aTo Do List Item to the Scheduler  
ToaddyourToDoListitemtothescheduler:  
1. From the To Do List display (see page 107), select the item you  
want to add to the schedule and press Options (right softkey).  
2. Highlight AddToSchedule and press  
.
Ⅲ
AddToSchedule to extract the item from the To Do List and  
make it a scheduled event.  
3. Enter the description using your keypad and press . (See  
“Adding an Event to the Scheduler” on page 102 for entering.)  
4. Press Save (left softkey).  
Deleting Items From theTo Do List  
TodeleteToDoListitems:  
1. From the To Do List display (see page 107), highlight the item  
you want to erase and press Options (right softkey).  
2. Highlight your desired option and press  
.
Ⅲ
EraseItem erases an item from the To Do List.  
Ⅲ
EraseSelection erases multiple selected To Do List items at  
one time. Press  
to check the box(es) next to the To Do  
List item(s) you want to delete and press Erase (left softkey)  
to erase. To check all boxes, press Options (right softkey),  
highlight CheckAll, and press  
.
Ⅲ
EraseAll erases all To Do List items.  
3. Select Yes and press  
.
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewing Memory inYour Scheduler  
Toviewavailablememoryspaceandoptions:  
1. From the Calendar display (see page 101), press Options (right  
softkey).  
2. Highlight ViewMemory and press  
.
3. Select Schedule, CallAlarm, or ToDoList and press . (The  
available memory space and options display.)  
For further options:  
4. Press Options (right softkey).  
5. Highlight an option and press  
.
Ⅲ
EraseOld deletes old events or call alarms.  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
EraseSelection deletes the To Do List items you selected.  
(See “Deleting Items From the To Do List ” on page 108.)  
EraseDone deletes the To Do List items that have been  
completed.  
EraseAll deletes all events, call alarms, or To Do List items.  
6. Select Yes or No and press  
.
PurgingAll Events,CallAlarms,or  
To Do List Items  
Todeleteallscheduledevents,callalarms,orToDoListitems:  
1. From the Calendar display (see page 101), press Options (right  
softkey).  
2. Highlight EraseMemory and press  
.
3. Select one item from the options and press  
.
Ⅲ
EraseOld deletes old events, call alarms, and To Do List items  
that are done.  
Ⅲ
EraseAll deletes all events, call alarms, and To Do List items.  
4. Select Yes and press  
.
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Personal Information Management  
DisplayingYour UserAddress  
Todisplaythephone’scurrentuseraddress:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select PhoneInfo and press  
.
4. Select Phone#/UserID and press  
.
Ⅲ
If you sign out, <PCS Vision Disabled> appears on the display.  
Finding Icon Definitions  
Toviewanexplanationoficonsthatappearonthedisplay:  
1. Press to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select PhoneInfo and press  
.
4. Select Help and press  
.
5. Select the item for which you want to see the explanation and  
press . (The icon’s explanation appears.)  
6. Press Done (left softkey) or  
to end.  
Displaying the Version Information  
Todisplaytheversionnumberofthesoftware,hardware,PRL  
(PreferredRoamingList),PRI(ProductReleaseInstructions),etc.,  
installedonyourphone:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select PhoneInfo and press  
4. Select Version and press  
.
.
.
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displaying Advanced Information  
Todisplayadvancedinformationsuchastechnologyandfrequency:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select PhoneInfo and press  
4. Select Advanced and press  
.
.
.
UsingYour Phone’sTools  
In addition to helping you be more efficient and organized, your  
phone offers useful and entertaining tools.  
Using the Alarm Clock  
Your phone comes with a built-in alarm clock with alarm capabilities.  
You can set up to 5 alarms. This feature is also available while your  
phone is turned off.  
Tousethealarmclock:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Tools/Extras and press  
.
.
3. Select AlarmClock and press  
4. Select an unassigned number and press  
.
5. Select the following items and press  
.
Ⅲ
Alarm to set the alarm On/Off. Select On and press  
.
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
Time to enter the alarm time. Enter the desired alarm time  
and press  
Repeat to select the alarm frequency. Select Once, Daily,  
.
Weekday, or your desired day of the week and press  
.
Description to enter a description of the alarm.  
6. Press Save (left softkey) to save the alarm settings.  
Note: In a no-service area or an analog service area, it’s necessary to set the  
actual time and date to use the Alarm Clock function after removing and  
installing your battery.  
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tostopthealarm:  
ᮣ
Press any key to stop the alarm.  
Torespondthealarm:  
ᮣ
Press  
to see the alarm details.  
– or –  
ᮣ
Press Snooze (left softkey) to repeat the alarm.  
– or –  
ᮣ
Press Dismiss (right softkey) to dismiss the alarm.  
Note: If you press  
before checking your event, Events (right softkey)  
appears in standby mode. Press Events (right softkey) to display the alarm.  
Tosetthealarmclocksettings:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Tools/Extras and press  
.
.
3. Select AlarmClock and press  
4. Press Settings (right softkey) and press  
.
5. Select RingerLength or SnoozeInterval and press  
.
Ⅲ
RingerLength to set the ringer length of alarm clock.  
Ⅲ
SnoozeInterval to set the interval time for snooze.  
6. Set the time by using numeric keys or by pressing the  
navigation key up or down and press  
.
Note: You can adjust the ringer type and ringer volume in your Settings menu.  
To change the ringer type, see “Selecting Ringer Types for Voicemail, Messages,  
or Calendar/Alarm” on page 39. To change the ringer volume, see “Adjusting the  
Phone’s Volume Settings” on page 41.  
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Calculator  
Your phone comes with a built-in calculator.  
Tousethecalculator:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Tools/Extras and press  
.
3. Select Calculator and press  
.
4. Enter numbers using your keypad. (Press the left softkey to  
insert a decimal point.)  
5. Press the appropriate navigation key for an arithmetic option  
(Up for addition, Down for subtraction, Left for multiplication,  
Right for division).  
6. Enter numbers and press  
for the result.  
Ⅲ
To clear the numbers, press CLR (right softkey).  
Ⅲ
To exit the calculator, press  
.
Using the World Clock  
This feature is available only in digital service areas.  
Tosettheworldclockdisplay:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Tools/Extras and press  
.
.
3. Select WorldClock and press  
4. The world clock display appears.  
Ⅲ
Press the navigation key right or left to change countries.  
Tip: Press Summer (left softkey) or Standard (right softkey) to select between  
daylight savings and standard time (if applicable). The icon is shown in  
summer mode.  
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Downloading Files  
Your phone allows you to download images (screen savers), ringers,  
games, etc., from a Sprint PCS Vision connection. It is also possible to  
download from certain menus (Contacts list, Ringer Setting, or  
Display Setting).  
TodownloadafilefromtheDownloadsmenu:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Downloads and press  
.
Ⅲ
Press the navigation key down for the shortcut (steps 1  
and 2).  
3. Press Options (right softkey) to display options.  
4. Select GetNew and press . (The browser will launch and  
display the Downloads main screen.)  
5. Select your desired file and follow the system prompts.  
– or –  
1. Follow steps 1-2 above.  
2. Select your desired data folder (for example, Games, Ringers, or  
Screen Savers) and press  
.
3. Select GetNew and press . (The browser will launch and  
display the category’s main screen.)  
4. Select your desired file and follow the system prompts.  
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TodownloadafilefromaContactslistentry:  
1. Press the navigation key right.  
2. Scroll to the entry for which you want to set the downloaded  
ringer or image and press  
3. Select a phone number and press Options (right softkey),  
highlight Edit, and press  
4. Scroll to Ringer or PictureID and press  
.
.
.
5. Scroll to GetNew and press . (The browser launches and  
displays the Download page.)  
6. Select your desired image or ringer file and follow the system  
prompts.  
TodownloadaringerfilefromtheRingerSettingmenu:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Sounds and press  
.
4. Select RingerType and press  
.
5. Select one item from VoiceCalls, Voicemail, Messaging, or  
Calendar/Alarm, and press  
.
Ⅲ
For VoiceCalls, select WithCallerID or NoCallerID.  
6. Press , scroll to GetNew, and press . (The browser  
launches and displays the Download page.)  
7. Select your desired ringer file and follow the system prompts.  
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TodownloadaringerfilefromtheStart-up/Power-offTonemenu:  
1. Select Others during step 4 on the previous page and press  
.
2. Select Start-upTone or Power-offTone and press  
.
3. Scroll to GetNew and press . (The browser launches and  
displays the Download page.)  
4. Select your desired ringer file and follow the system prompts.  
TodownloadanimagefilefromtheDisplaySettingmenu  
(AnimationandIncomingCalls):  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Display and press  
.
4. Select Animation or IncomingCalls and press  
.
Ⅲ
For Animation, select Standby, OutgoingCalls, or  
ServiceSearch.  
5. Press , scroll to GetNew, and press . (The browser  
launches and displays the Download page.)  
6. Select your desired image file and follow the system prompts.  
TodownloadanimagefilefromtheScreenSavermenu:  
1. Select StandbyDisplay during step 4 above and press  
2. Select MainLCD or SubLCD and press  
3. Select ScreenSaver and press  
.
.
.
4. Press , scroll to GetNew, and press . (The browser  
launches and displays the Download page.)  
5. Select your desired image file and follow the system prompts.  
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Confirming the Downloaded Data  
The downloaded data will automatically be classified as games,  
ringers, images (screen savers), videos, or applications. However, if  
any data has a different category, it will be classified as dynamic (the  
folder name is variable). If data doesn’t belong to any of the above, it  
will be classified as others.  
Toconfirmthedownloadeddata:  
1. Press  
2. Select Downloads and press  
3. Select your desired data folder (for example, Games, Ringers, or  
ScreenSavers) and press  
to access the main menu.  
.
.
4. Select the downloaded data you want to confirm and press  
.
Tip: The names of dynamic folders are variable depending on data.  
You can manage your contents in the browser.  
ToconfirmyourContentManager:  
1. Press  
2. Select Downloads and press  
3. Press Options (right softkey), select MyContentManager, and  
press to launch the browser.  
to access the main menu.  
.
Tip: You can also access your Content Manager from any folder in the  
Downloads menu. After selecting a folder, select My Content Manager and  
press  
to launch the browser.  
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IconIndication  
Type Item  
Icon (appears at the left side  
of the downloaded data)  
From Web Ringers (~2048KB)  
Voice (~2048KB)  
(New Data)  
(New Data)  
(New Data)  
(New Data)  
(New Data)  
(New Data)  
(New Data)  
(New Data)  
(New Data)  
(Assigned Data)  
(Assigned Data)  
(Assigned Data)  
(Assigned Data)  
(Assigned Data)  
(Assigned Data)  
Screen Savers/Images (~128KB)  
Animation (~2048KB)  
Animation Ringers (~2048KB)  
Videos (~2048KB)  
Games (~2048KB)  
Applications (~2048KB)  
Unknown types (~2048KB)  
Note: Download icon subject to change  
Downloaded Data Options  
SelectingDownloadSettings  
This feature is available when you select a Java application.  
Toselectthesettingsforthedownloadeddata:  
1. Press  
2. Select Downloads and press  
3. Select Games or Applications and press  
to access the main menu.  
.
.
4. Select the data for which you want to select settings and press  
Options (right softkey).  
5. Highlight Settings and press  
.
6. Select NetworkAccess or PushRegistry and press  
.
Ⅲ
NetworkAccess to select the Network Access availability.  
Ⅲ
PushRegistry to select the availability to communicate with  
other mobile phones such as chat or match-up games (if  
applicable).  
7. Select AlwaysAllow, Ask, or NeverAllow, and press  
.
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AssigningtheDownloadedData  
Toassignthedownloadeddata:  
1. Press  
2. Select Downloads and press  
3. Select Ringers or ScreenSavers and press  
to access the main menu.  
.
.
4. Select the data you want to assign and press Options (right  
softkey).  
5. Highlight Setas and press  
.
6. Highlight the menu you want to assign and press  
.
SortingtheDownloadedData  
The files downloaded via the Web are stored in alphabetical order.  
You may also store the data in memory size order.  
Tosortdownloadedfiles:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Downloads and press  
.
3. Select a folder and press  
.
4. Press Options (right softkey).  
5. Highlight Sorting from the options and press  
6. Highlight Name or Size and press  
.
.
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ViewingtheDownloadedDataSize  
This feature allows you to confirm each downloaded file’s size and  
the remaining download capacity.  
Toviewthedatasize:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Downloads and press  
.
3. Select a folder and press  
.
4. Press Options (right softkey).  
5. Highlight Icon/Size and press . (Data size is displayed at the  
left of the downloaded data name.)  
ViewingtheMemorySpace  
This feature allows you to confirm how much memory is left and may  
be used for downloading files.  
Toviewtheavailablememoryspace:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Downloads and press  
.
3. Press Options (right softkey).  
4. Highlight ViewMemory and press . (Used and Free memory  
size are displayed.)  
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Erasing the Downloaded Data  
Toerasetheselecteddownloadeddata:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Downloads and press  
.
3. Select a folder and press  
.
4. Select the downloaded data you want to erase and press Options  
(right softkey).  
5. Highlight Erase and press  
6. Press Continue (left softkey) to continue.  
7. Highlight Yes and press to erase the data.  
.
Toerasealldownloadeddatainafolder:  
1. Follow steps 1-4 above.  
2. Highlight EraseAll and press  
.
3. Highlight Yes and press  
to erase all data in the folder you  
select.  
Note: It takes a while when you erase lots of downloaded data. Some data will  
remain if you answer an incoming call during erasing process.  
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 2I  
Using Your Phone’s Voice Services  
In This Section  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
UsingAutomaticSpeechRecognition  
ManagingVoiceMemos  
SettingUpScreenCall  
Yourwirelessphone’sVoiceServicesletyouplacecallsusingyour  
voice, storevoicereminders, andrecordmemosrightonyourphone.  
This section includes easy-to-follow instructions on using voice-  
activated dialing and managing voice memos.  
Section 2I: Using Your Phone’s Voice Services  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Automatic Speech Recognition  
Your Sanyo SCP-7400 Phone is equipped with an Automatic Speech  
Recognition (ASR) feature. This feature allows you to make calls or  
use the phone’s functions by simply using your voice. All you have to  
do is to talk into the phone, and the phone will recognize your voice  
and complete tasks by itself. You can activate Automatic Speech  
Recognition whether the phone is open or closed.  
ActivatingAutomatic Speech Recognition  
ToactivateAutomaticSpeechRecognition:  
ᮣ
From standby mode, press and hold  
– or –  
or  
.
ᮣ
From standby mode, press  
.
The phone displays the Command menu and prompts you to say the  
name of the command you want to use. To complete your task,  
simply follow the voice prompts. You can speak the name of the  
command when your phone displays the icon.  
ThefollowingisalistofavailableASRcommands:  
ⅷ
Contact to call an entry in your Contacts list. (See page 124 for  
details.)  
ⅷ
DialNumber to dial a phone number by speaking the number.  
(See page 125 for details.)  
ⅷ
CallVoiceTag to find the name or phone number stored in the  
Voice Tag List. (See page 126 for details.)  
ⅷ
FindContact to find an entry stored in your Contacts list.  
(See page 125 for details.)  
ⅷ
DigitTraining to adapt the system to your voice. (See page 129 for  
details.)  
ⅷ
PhoneStatus to notify you of your phone number, the current  
signal strength, and the battery level.  
ⅷ
EditVoiceTag to add, review, or erase a Voice Tag entry.  
(See page 126 for details.)  
ⅷ
Help to get instructions for Automatic Speech Recognition of  
voice call.  
ⅷ
ReadyLink to place a Ready Link call from the Ready Link List. (See  
page 128 for details.)  
Tip: You can also activate Automatic Speech Recognition with the flip closed.  
Press  
to activate the Command menu and simply follow the voice prompts.  
Section 2I: Using Your Phone’s Voice Services  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note: The speech recognition system will wait 7.5 seconds for you to respond to  
a prompt. After 7.5 seconds, the phone will display an error message and your  
command will be cancelled.  
Note: If your phone is unable to recognize an ASR command after three  
attempts, an error message will appear on the display and the phone will return  
to standby mode.  
Making aVoice Call by UsingASR  
With ASR, you can make a voice call by speaking a name, phone  
number, or using a voice tag.  
Tomakeavoicecallbyspeakinganame:  
1. Press and hold  
or  
to activate the Command menu.  
2. Say “Contact” to your phone.  
3. Say the full name of a contact in your Contacts list (e.g. “John  
Jones”).  
4. Say the label you’d like to call (e.g. “Mobile”).  
Shortcut: To execute several commands at a time, you can also say several  
commands continuously (e.g. “Contact, John Jones, Mobile”).  
5. The phone will automatically place a call if it recognizes your  
voice.  
6. When you are finished, press  
.
Note: If the phone does not recognize the name, the phone will find the closest  
match in your Contacts list and display a list of up to three names. You will hear  
the voice prompt “Did you say…” followed by the matched name. You can  
confirm the name by saying “Yes,” or change the selection by saying “No.”  
Tip: During ASR operation, you can also select your desired items by using the  
navigation key or pressing available softkeys on the display.  
Section 2I: Using Your Phone’s Voice Services  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tomakeacallbyspeakingaphonenumber:  
1. Press and hold or to activate the Command menu.  
2. Say “Dial Number” to your phone.  
3. Say the digits of the phone number using a natural voice.  
Shortcut: You can also say “Dial Number” followed by the number you want to call.  
4. The phone automatically places the call if it recognizes your  
voice.  
5. When you are finished, press  
.
Note: If the phone does not recognize the number, the phone will find the most  
likely match number and display a list of up to three numbers. You will hear the  
voice prompt “Did you say…” followed by the matched number. You can confirm  
the number by saying “Yes,” or say “No” to change the selection.  
Finding Contacts List Entries  
This feature allows you to find the entry in your Contacts list by  
saying the name.  
TofindacontactintheContactslist:  
1. Press and hold  
or  
to activate the Command menu.  
2. Say “Find Contact” to your phone.  
3. Say the full name of a contact in your Contacts list (e.g. “John  
Jones”).  
4. The phone will display the contact details for the recognized  
name.  
5. To make a call, select the desired number from the list by using  
your navigation key and press  
or  
.
Section 2I: Using Your Phone’s Voice Services  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making a Call Using a VoiceTag  
With a voice tag you record, your phone will automatically dial a  
phone number. Your phone can store up to 20 voice tags. (To create a  
voice tag, see “Programming a Voice Tag” below.)  
Tomakeacallbyusingavoicetag:  
1. Press and hold  
or  
to activate the Command menu.  
2. Say “Call Voice Tag” to your phone.  
3. Say your recorded voice tag.  
4. The phone automatically places the call if it recognizes your  
voice.  
5. When you are finished, press  
.
Tip: To redial your last outgoing call by using ASR, press  
or  
twice.  
Programming aVoiceTag  
Toprogramavoicetag:  
1. Press and hold  
or  
to activate the Command menu.  
2. Say “Edit Voice Tag.”  
3. Say “New Entry.”  
4. Say the digits of the phone number. (The phone number will be  
repeated and you will be asked to verify.)  
5. Say “Yes” to confirm or “No” to cancel.  
6. Say the name of the person you want to add to this voice tag.  
7. Respond to the prompt by repeating the name after the beep.  
(You will hear a confirmation that voice tag has been  
successfully saved.)  
Tip: Record voice tags in a quiet environment.  
Section 2I: Using Your Phone’s Voice Services  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ReviewingVoiceTags  
Toreviewvoicetags:  
1. Press and hold  
or  
to activate the Command menu.  
2. Say “Edit Voice Tag.”  
3. Say “Review List.” (A review list will display and you will hear all  
of the names and phone numbers saved in the voice tag list.)  
Tip: During step 3 above, you can make a call to the highlighted number by  
pressing  
or  
.
Erasing aVoiceTag  
Toeraseavoicetag:  
1. Press and hold  
or  
to activate the Command menu.  
2. Say “Edit Voice Tag.”  
3. Say “Erase Entry.”  
4. Say the name you want to erase from your voice tag list. (The  
name will be repeated and you will be asked to verify it.)  
5. Say “Yes” to confirm or “No” to cancel. (You will hear a  
confirmation that the voice tag has been successfully erased.)  
Tip: You can erase all voice tags through your phone’s Settings menu (see  
“Erasing All Voice Tags” on page 73).  
Section 2I: Using Your Phone’s Voice Services  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making a Ready Link Call by UsingASR  
You can place a Ready Link call by using automatic speech  
recognition from your Ready Link List. To make a Ready Link Call,  
your phone’s Ready Link mode must be set to Enable (see “Setting  
Ready Link Mode” on page 138 for details).  
TomakeaReadyLinkCall:  
1. Press and hold  
or  
to activate the Command menu.  
2. Say “Ready Link.” (Your Ready Link List will display.)  
3. Choose from one of the following options:  
Ⅲ
Contact to place a Ready Link call from the Personal List.  
Ⅲ
Group to place a Ready Link call from the Personal Group  
List.  
Ⅲ
DialNumber to place a Ready Link call by entering a number.  
Ⅲ
PhoneStatus to notify you of your phone number and the  
current signal strength.  
Ⅲ
Help to activate the Automatic Speech Recognition  
instruction of Ready Link call.  
4. Say “Contact,” “Group,” or “Dial Number.”  
5. Say the contacts name in your Ready Link List or digits of the  
phone number. (Wait for the prompt.)  
Section 2I: Using Your Phone’s Voice Services  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Respond to the prompt by saying the name or group name.  
Ⅲ
To place the call, press and hold  
. (See “Making and  
Receiving a Ready Link Call” on page 140 for details.)  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
To display other Contacts list, press Goto (left softkey),  
highlight your desired list, and press . (See “Selecting a  
Contacts List” on page 140.)  
To display the Ready Link options, press Options (right  
softkey) highlight your desired option, and press . (See  
“Ready Link Options” on page 146.)  
Tip: If you say “Contact” or “Dial Number” during step 3 on the previous page,  
you can say following commands continuously (e.g. “Contact, John Jones” or  
“Dial Number, 999-999-9999”).  
Tip: To redial the last Ready Link call by using ASR with the flip open, press and  
hold  
on the side of your phone and follow the voice prompts.  
Tip: You can also make a Ready Link call to Contact, Group, and dialed number by  
using ASR with the flip closed. Press and hold  
prompts.  
, and follow the voice  
Using DigitTraining  
This feature allows you to train the phone to recognize your voice.  
You can get better recognition accuracy by programming your  
intonation pattern into your phone.  
ToprogramDigitTraining:  
1. Press and hold  
or  
to activate the Command menu.  
2. Say “Digit Training.”  
3. Say “Start” to start programming.  
4. Follow the voice prompts and recite the digits into your phone’s  
microphone. (A voice prompt will indicate the current rate of  
adaptation.)  
5. Respond to the voice prompt repeatedly until adaptation is  
complete. (When you are finished training, you will hear a  
confirmation that the adaptation has been successfully  
completed.)  
Note: Try digit training in a quiet environment for the best results. When you train,  
make sure you speak clearly and distinctly in your natural voice.  
Section 2I: Using Your Phone’s Voice Services  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ToactivateDigitTraining:  
1. Press and hold  
or  
to activate the Command menu.  
2. Say “Digit Training.”  
3. Say “On” or press On (right softkey) to activate the existing data.  
(A voice prompt will announce the activation of digit training.)  
TodeactivateDigitTraining:  
1. Follow steps 1-2 above.  
2. Say “Off” or press Off (right softkey) to deactivate the existing  
data. (A voice prompt will announce the deactivation of digit  
training. The adaptation returns to its default setting.)  
Phone Status Command  
This feature uses a voice prompt to tell you your phone number and  
current signal strength.  
ToactivatePhoneStatusCommand:  
1. Press and hold  
or  
to activate the Command menu.  
2. Say “Phone Status.” (You will hear your phone number and  
signal strength.)  
ASR Help Command  
This feature will help you learn the basics of using automatic speech  
recognition.  
ToactivateHelpCommand:  
1. Press and hold  
or  
to activate the Command menu.  
2. Say “Help.” (You will hear the voice prompts of helpful  
instructions for voice call.)  
Section 2I: Using Your Phone’s Voice Services  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Managing Voice Memos  
You can use your phone’s Voice Services to record brief memos to  
remind you of important events, phone numbers, or grocery list items.  
Tip: If you haven’t signed up for the Ready Link service and Ready Link mode is  
set to Disable, or the Ready Link service is locked, you can use the Ready  
Link/Memo Button (  
) as a Voice Memo button in standby mode. You can use  
it to record memos or display Memo options.  
RecordingVoice Memos  
Torecordavoicememo:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Tools/Extras and press  
3. Select VoiceServices and press  
4. Select VoiceMemo and press  
.
.
.
5. Select Record or Rec:Speaker, and press  
.
6. Start recording after the beep.  
Toendtherecordingofyourmemo:  
ᮣ
Press  
,
, or  
.
Tip: Recording terminates automatically after 18 seconds.  
Torecordtheotherparty’svoiceduringaphonecall:  
1. During a call, press Options (right softkey).  
2. Highlight Tools/Extras and press  
3. Select VoiceServices and press  
4. Select VoiceMemo and press  
.
.
.
5. Select Record and press  
.
6. Start recording after the beep.  
Section 2I: Using Your Phone’s Voice Services  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Toendtherecordingofyourconversation:  
ᮣ
Press  
– or –  
Press  
– or –  
or  
while recording.  
ᮣ
to stop recording and disconnect the call.  
ᮣ
Recording stops when the other party hangs up the call.  
Note: Memo recording is disabled while you are roaming in analog service areas.  
Note: Your phone can store up to 12 memos and the total available recording time  
is 72 seconds (maximum of 18 seconds per memo).  
Tip: Voice Memos are stored with the date and time stamp in reverse  
chronological order.  
ReviewingVoice Memos  
Toplaythevoicememosyouhaverecorded:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Tools/Extras and press  
3. Select VoiceServices and press  
4. Select VoiceMemo and press  
.
.
.
5. Select Play or Play:Speaker and press  
.
6. Select one memo from the list and press  
.
– or –  
If you want to play all of the memos continuously, select All and  
press  
.
7. Press  
to stop playing.  
Ⅲ
Press Slow (left softkey) or Fast (right softkey) to change the  
playing speed.  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
Press  
to switch speakerphone mode.  
To play a more recent or older memo, press the navigation  
key right or left.  
Tip: You can also switch speakerphone mode by pressing Options (right softkey)  
and selecting Speaker On/Off during step 6 above.  
Section 2I: Using Your Phone’s Voice Services  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ErasingVoice Memos  
Toeraseallvoicememos:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Tools/Extras and press  
3. Select VoiceServices and press  
4. Select VoiceMemo and press  
.
.
.
5. Select Play or Play:Speaker and press  
.
6. Press Options (right softkey).  
7. Highlight EraseAll and press  
.
8. Select Yes and press  
.
– or –  
1. Follow steps 1-4 above.  
2. Select EraseAll and press  
.
3. Select Yes and press  
.
Toeraseselectedmemos:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Tools/Extras and press  
3. Select VoiceServices and press  
4. Select VoiceMemo and press  
.
.
.
5. Select Play or Play:Speaker and press  
.
6. Select the memo you want to erase and press Options (right  
softkey).  
7. Highlight Erase and press  
8. Select Yes and press  
.
.
Section 2I: Using Your Phone’s Voice Services  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up Screen Call  
This feature enables you to screen incoming calls by using a recorded  
announcement, either one that is pre-recorded or one that you record.  
Activating Screen Call  
TostartScreenCallwhenyouhaveincomingcalls:  
1. When the phone rings or vibrates, press Options (right softkey)  
to display the options.  
2. Highlight ScreenCall and press  
.
TosetAutoScreenCall:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Tools/Extras and press  
3. Select VoiceServices and press  
4. Select ScreenCall and press  
.
.
.
5. Select Auto and press  
.
6. Select On and press  
.
7. Set the answering time by using numeric keys or by pressing the  
navigation key up or down.  
8. Press  
or OK (left softkey). (The icon is displayed on the  
standby display.)  
Tip: If a new caller’s message is waiting, the  
icon appears on the display.  
The memos recorded while activating “Screen Call” are shown with the or  
icon in the Voice Memo list ( : once played, : not played yet). To listen to the  
message, see “Reviewing Voice Memos” on page 132.  
Tip: While the caller’s message is being recorded, press  
or press to stop recording and disconnects the call.  
to answer the call,  
Section 2I: Using Your Phone’s Voice Services  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting anAnnouncement for Screen Call  
ToselectaScreenCallannouncement:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Tools/Extras and press  
3. Select VoiceServices and press  
4. Select ScreenCall and press  
.
.
.
5. Select Announcement and press  
6. Depending on your preference, highlight Pre-Recorded or  
Custom and press  
.
.
RecordingYourNameforaPre-RecordedAnnouncement  
You can use a pre-recorded announcement with or without your  
name. If you record your name, your phone uses your name to  
announce that you are not available to answer the call.  
Torecordyourname:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Tools/Extras and press  
3. Select VoiceServices and press  
4. Select ScreenCall and press  
.
.
.
5. Select Announcement and press  
.
6. Select Pre-Recorded and press Edit (right softkey).  
7. Highlight RecordName and press  
.
Ⅲ
If your name has already been recorded, select Yes or No to  
overwrite the existing recording.  
8. Press  
9. Press  
to start the first recording.  
to stop recording.  
10. After the first recording, press  
again to start the second  
recording.  
11. Press  
to stop recording.  
Tip: Recording terminates automatically in 12 seconds.  
Section 2I: Using Your Phone’s Voice Services  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording a CustomizedAnnouncement  
Torecordanannouncement:  
1. Follow steps 1-5 on the previous page.  
2. Select Custom and press Edit (right softkey).  
3. Highlight Record and press  
.
Ⅲ
When an announcement has already been recorded, select  
Yes or No to overwrite the existing recording.  
4. Press  
5. Press  
to start the first recording.  
to stop recording.  
6. After the first recording, press  
again to start the second  
recording.  
7. Press  
to stop recording.  
Tip: Recording terminates automatically in 12 seconds.  
Reviewing anAnnouncement  
Toreviewanannouncement:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Tools/Extras and press  
3. Select VoiceServices and press  
4. Select ScreenCall and press  
.
.
.
5. Select Announcement and press  
.
6. Select Pre-Recorded or Custom and press Edit (right softkey).  
7. Highlight Play or Play:Speaker and press  
.
Erasing anAnnouncement  
Toeraseanannouncement:  
1. Follow steps 1-6 above.  
2. Select EraseName to erase the name for a Pre-Recorded  
announcement and press  
.
– or –  
Select Erase to erase the message for a Custom announcement  
and press  
.
3. Select Yes and press  
.
Section 2I: Using Your Phone’s Voice Services  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 2J  
Using Ready Link  
In This Section  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
GettingStartedWithReadyLink  
MakingandReceivingaReadyLinkCall  
AddingandEditingReadyLinkContacts  
ErasingReadyLinkListEntries  
UpdatingYourReadyLinkLists  
ManagingReadyLinkSettings  
YourSanyoSCP-7400Phonegivesyoutheabilitytoquicklyconnectwith  
otherReadyLinkusersforwalkie-talkie-stylecommunicationfrom  
anywhere, toanywhereonthenetworkprovidedtoyou. It’s ideal for  
quick two-way conversations with your friends, family, and co-  
workers.  
ThissectionexplainsthefeaturesandoptionsofReadyLink.  
Section 2J: Using Ready Link  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting StartedWith Ready Link  
Ready Link allows you to enjoy quick, two-way, “walkie-talkie-style”  
communication with your friends, family, and co-workers. You can  
make 1-to-1 or 1-to-many calls (up to 5 others on the same call) to any  
other Ready Link user, anywhere on the network provided to you.  
You can make and receive Ready Link calls when your phone displays  
the  
or  
icon.  
Setting Ready Link Mode  
ToenableordisableReadyLinkmode:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select ReadyLink and press  
.
4. Select Enable/Disable and press  
.
5. Select Enable and press . (The default setting is Disable.)  
Ⅲ
Enable: Lets you make or receive Ready Link calls any time  
your phone is not in use.  
Ⅲ
Disable: Disables your phone’s Ready Link service; you will  
not be able to make or receive Ready Link calls or access  
your Ready Link contacts.  
Tip: If you haven’t signed up for the Ready Link service and Ready Link mode is  
set to Disable, or the Ready Link service is locked, you can use the Ready  
Link/Memo Button (  
) as a Voice Memo button in standby mode.  
PreparingYourPhoneforReadyLinkService  
Every time you turn on your phone, your phone will identify itself  
and make itself available to the Ready Link network.  
ᮣ
When you turn on your phone in an area where Ready Link  
service is available, your phone will display “Preparing...Please  
wait.” (The  
icon appears on the display. Your phone is now  
ready to make and receive Ready Link calls.)  
Section 2J: Using Ready Link  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ready Link Call Alerts  
There are several ways your phone alerts you during Ready Link calls.  
When you make or receive a Ready Link call:  
ⅷ
The phone sounds (depending on the Ringer Type and Ringer  
Volume setting).  
ⅷ
The backlight illuminates.  
ⅷ
The screen displays a Ready Link call message.  
ⅷ
The other party’s Ready Link number and name (if available) are  
displayed.  
ⅷ
The screen displays who has the floor.  
The status of a Ready Link call is displayed on your phone as follows:  
ⅷ
The Green LED On indicates you have the floor and may speak.  
ⅷ
The Red LED On indicates another contact has the floor.  
ⅷ
The LED Off indicates the floor is open. (You can take the floor  
and speak by pressing and holding  
.)  
MainLCDDisplayduringReadyLinkCall  
R-Link Call:  
R-Link Call:  
R-Link Call:  
Adam Carlile  
Adam Carlile  
Adam Carlile  
913-555-1111  
Floor is open.  
Floor is open  
913-555-1111  
has floor.  
913-555-1111  
You have floor.  
You have floor  
Other has floor  
SubLCDDisplayduringReadyLinkCall  
Adam Carlile  
You have floor  
Adam Carlile  
Adam Carlile  
Other has floor  
Floor is open  
Section 2J: Using Ready Link  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making and Receiving a Ready Link Call  
Displaying the Ready Link List  
ᮣ
From standby mode, press R-Link (left softkey) or the  
Ready Link/Memo button on the side of your phone (  
) to  
access the Ready Link List.  
Tip: The first time you access the list, the Ready Link Help message will appear.  
Press Yes (left softkey) and Next (left softkey) to read a brief introduction of  
Ready Link.  
Selecting a Contacts List  
When your phone displays a Ready Link List, the left softkey is  
labeled Goto. To switch to another contacts list, press Goto (left  
softkey), highlight your desired list, and press  
.
ⅷ
PersonalList/PersonalGrps. contain your personal Ready Link  
contact names and numbers, separately or in groups. You can  
create and edit your own Personal List. Your phone can store a  
total of 200 entries (you may include up to five contacts per  
group).  
ⅷ
ⅷ
Outgoing shows the last 10 different Ready Link calls you placed.  
Incoming shows the last 10 different Ready Link calls you  
accepted.  
ⅷ
Missed shows the last 10 Ready Link calls you missed.  
Note: The icon next to the group name indicates a group.  
Section 2J: Using Ready Link  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making a Ready Link Call (1-to-1 Call)  
You can place a 1-to-1 Ready Link call by entering a Ready Link  
number or by selecting a contact from the Ready Link List.  
ToplaceaReadyLinkcallbyselectingacontact:  
1. Press R-Link (left softkey) or press  
.
2. Press Goto (left softkey), highlight the list from which you want  
to place a call (PersonalList, Outgoing, Incoming, or Missed), and  
press  
.
Tip: You can also select Enter R-Link# from the Go to option to enter a Ready Link  
number directly. (See page 143 for details.)  
3. Scroll to the contact you want to call, and press and hold  
place the call and get the floor. (You will see R-Linkcalling... and  
Connecting... followed by “Youhavefloor.” You can now begin  
speaking.)  
to  
– or –  
Scroll to the contact you want to call and press and release  
to place the call. (The call will connect as described above, but  
“Floorisopen.” will appear on the screen and either you or your  
contact may press and hold  
to take the floor and speak.)  
Note: During a Ready Link call, the “floor” is the right to speak. When you see  
“Floor is open.,” the first person to press the Ready Link/Memo button (  
) can  
speak (while holding the button). Only the person who has the floor can speak. The  
phone beeps if you press  
when another contact has the floor.  
4. Continue holding  
as you speak. (When you are finished  
to allow the other contact to speak.  
speaking, release  
When the other party takes the floor, you will see the speaker’s  
name and phone number and the text “hasfloor.”)  
5. When you are finished, press  
.
Note: When neither party has the floor during a Ready Link call, “Floor is open.”  
appears on the display. If no one takes the floor for 20 seconds, the Ready Link  
call ends automatically.  
Tip: If you press  
voice call.  
or  
during step 3 above, you can make a standard  
Section 2J: Using Ready Link  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making a Ready Link Call (Group Call)  
You can make a Ready Link call to all members in a Group entry,  
which you have in your Ready Link List. You can communicate with  
up to five members at a time.  
ToplaceaReadyLinkGroupcall:  
1. Press R-Link (left softkey) or press  
.
2. Press Goto (left softkey), highlight PersonalGrps. and press  
.
3. Scroll to the group you want to call, and press and hold  
to  
place the call and take the floor. (You will see R-Linkcalling... and  
Connecting... followed by “Youhavefloor.” Continue with the  
Ready Link call as described on page 141.)  
Ⅲ
To make a Ready Link call to a group member, select your  
desired group, highlight your desired group member, and  
press and hold  
.
Ⅲ
If one of the group members takes the floor, you will see the  
member’s name and Ready Link number on the display.  
4. When the call is finished, press  
.
Tip: The phone beeps if you press when another contact has the floor.  
Tip: You can also make a Group Call after checking the group member. Press  
to display group members, highlight <Call Group> and press and hold  
step 3 above.  
during  
Tip: To redial your last Ready Link call, highlight Redial and press and hold  
from the Ready Link List.  
Section 2J: Using Ready Link  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making a Ready Link Call by Entering a Number  
ToplaceaReadyLinkcallbyenteringanumber:  
1. From standby mode, enter the Ready Link number you want to  
dial.  
2. Press  
to place the Ready Link call. (Continue holding  
to take the floor and speak.)  
Ⅲ
The contact’s name appears on the display if there is a  
matched number in your Ready Link List.  
3. Continue with the Ready Link call, pressing and holding  
to  
speak and releasing it to allow others to reply.  
4. When the call is finished, press  
– or –  
.
1. Press R-Link (left softkey) or press  
.
2. Press Goto (left softkey), highlight EnterR-Link# and press  
3. Enter the Ready Link number you want to dial.  
4. Follow steps 2-4 above.  
.
Note: Ready Link numbers must contain ten digits (area code + phone number).  
Your Ready Link number is the same as your wireless phone number.  
Section 2J: Using Ready Link  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MissedCallNotificationforReadyLinkCalls  
When an incoming Ready Link call is not answered, the Missed Call  
Notification and the  
icon are displayed on your screen.  
TocallthelastMissedReadyLinkcall:  
ᮣ
Simply press and hold  
while the Missed Call Notification is  
displayed. (Continue with the Ready Link call as described  
previously.)  
Tip: If you have two or more notifications, the event list will appear.  
ToerasetheMissedCalllog:  
ᮣ
Press Dismiss (right softkey).  
Tip: If you press  
before checking your notification, Events (right softkey)  
appears in standby mode. Press Events (right softkey) to display the notification  
list.  
Note: When you display Missed Calls entries, you will see the icon next to the  
name. The icon will remain until you make or receive a Ready Link call to or  
from the entry. The  
icon appears next to the new missed call entry.  
Section 2J: Using Ready Link  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Receiving a Ready Link Call  
ToreceiveaReadyLinkcall:  
1. Make sure your phone’s Ready Link mode is enabled (see  
“Setting Ready Link Mode” on page 138).  
2. When you receive a Ready Link call from a contact, “R-Link  
Call,” the contact’s name, and the Ready Link number appear on  
the display. (You do not need to take any action to answer the  
call.)  
Ⅲ
When you receive a group call, “Group Call” and the  
Ready Link number appear.  
Ⅲ
If nobody takes the floor for 20 seconds, the call will be a  
missed Ready Link call.  
3. If the person placing the call has kept the floor (held the  
Ready Link/Memo button), you will see the contact name and  
Ready Link number along with “hasfloor.,” and you will hear the  
caller speaking.  
4. When the caller finishes speaking and releases  
, you will  
see “Floorisopen.” on the display screen. Press and hold  
to  
take the floor and reply to the caller. (You will see “Youhavefloor.”  
and hear a tone confirming that you may speak.)  
5. When the conversation is finished, press  
.
Tip: You can also receive a Ready Link call with the flip closed. Press and hold  
to take the floor when the floor is open.  
Note: You can change the volume and the speakerphone setting while a  
Ready Link call is activated. Volume: Adjust the voice volume by using the Side  
Volume key or by pressing the navigation key up or down except when you are  
pressing and holding  
.
. Speaker: Switch the speakerphone on or off by pressing  
Section 2J: Using Ready Link  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ready Link Options  
When you use Ready Link, several options are available by pressing  
Options (right softkey). To select an option, highlight it and press  
.
ⅷ
CopytoPersonal to copy a contact to the Personal List. (This  
option doesn’t appear if the entry is already in the Personal List or  
when you select Personal List/Personal Groups.)  
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
Edit to edit a Ready Link number and/or name. (See page 150.)  
CopytoPh. Book to copy a contact to the Contacts List.  
Erase to erase a contact. EraseGroup appears when you highlight a  
group.  
ⅷ
AddContact to add a new contact. AddGroup appears when you  
highlight a group list. (See page 148 for details.)  
ⅷ
ⅷ
EraseR-LinkList to erase entries saved in the Ready Link List.  
Help to see the Ready Link instruction page.  
Adding and Editing Ready Link Contacts  
CopyinganEntrytoPersonalListorPersonalGroupList  
You can copy an entry to your Personal Lists from several different  
sources. If the selected entry is already stored in the Personal Lists,  
the “copy” option does not appear.  
TocopyanentryfromtheReadyLinkList:  
1. Press R-Link (left softkey) or press  
.
2. Press Goto (left softkey), highlight the list from which you want  
to copy an entry (Outgoing, Incoming, or Missed), and press  
.
3. Select the entry you want to copy (or scroll to highlight the  
Redial entry at the top of your screen) and press Options (right  
softkey). To select an option, highlight it and press  
.
Ⅲ
CopytoPersonal to copy the contact to the Personal List.  
Ⅲ
CopytoPh. Book to copy the contact to the Contacts list.  
4. Press Yes (left softkey) to copy and save the entry to your  
Personal List.  
Section 2J: Using Ready Link  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving a Ready Link Number  
When you have finished a Ready Link call, you will see the Ready Link  
number and the text “R-Link call ended.” on the display. You can save  
a Ready Link number from the ending display to your Personal Lists.  
Tosavethenumber:  
1. From the end display, press Save (right softkey).  
2. Enter a name and press  
3. Press Save (left softkey).  
4. Press Yes (left softkey).  
.
Note: If the number is already stored in the Personal List or Personal Groups, the  
“Save” softkey does not appear.  
Finding an Entry in the Ready Link List  
You can find your desired entry by entering a few letters.  
TofindaReadyLinkentry:  
1. Press R-Link (left softkey) or press  
2. Press Goto (left softkey), highlight your desired list (PersonalList,  
or PersonalGrps.), and press  
.
.
3. Enter the first letter or the first few letters of the name.  
Ⅲ
The display shows the list beginning with the letter(s) you  
entered.  
4. Scroll through the list and press  
to select your desired entry.  
Section 2J: Using Ready Link  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding a New Contact toYour Personal List  
You can store a total of 200 entries in the Personal Lists.  
ToaddanewReadyLinkcontact:  
1. Press R-Link (left softkey) or press  
.
2. Select <AddContact> and press  
.
– or –  
Select a contact and press Options (right softkey). Then  
highlight AddContact and press  
.
3. Enter a name for the new contact and press . (This is the  
name you will see when calling or receiving a call from the  
contact.)  
4. Select R-LinkNumber, enter the contact’s 10-digit Ready Link  
number (their wireless phone number) and press  
.
5. Press Save (left softkey) to save the new contact to your  
Personal List.  
Tip: You are not allowed to use the following symbols during step 4: “:”, “@”, “;”,  
“/”, “ ”, “(”, and “)”.  
*
Section 2J: Using Ready Link  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding a New Group toYour Personal Group List  
You can add new groups to the Personal Group List. Each group can  
include up to five members. You can enter a group member directly,  
or select the member from the Personal List.  
ToaddanewReadyLinkgroupentry:  
1. Press R-Link (left softkey) or press  
.
2. Press Goto (left softkey), highlight PersonalGrps., and press  
.
3. Select <AddGroup> and press  
.
– or –  
Select an entry and press Options (right softkey). Then highlight  
AddGroup and press  
.
4. Enter a Group Name, press , and press Next (left softkey).  
5. To add contacts to the group, press Add (right softkey).  
6. Highlight one item from the following and press  
:
Ⅲ
New to add a new contact. See page 148 for details.  
Ⅲ
fromPersonal to add a contact from your Personal List.  
7. Scroll to the contacts you want to add and press  
(right softkey) to include the entries.  
or Pick  
8. Press Done (left softkey) when you are finished selecting  
contacts, then press Update (left softkey) to update your  
Personal Group List with the new group entry.  
Tip: You can also add members directly. From step 5 above, highlight  
<Add Members> and press . Enter the new member’s name and R-Link number  
and press Save (left softkey) to save the entry.  
Section 2J: Using Ready Link  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing a Contact inYour Personal List  
ToeditaPersonalListcontact:  
1. Press R-Link (left softkey) or  
.
2. Scroll to the entry you want to edit and press Options (right  
softkey).  
Ⅲ
Edit to edit the selected contact.  
Ⅲ
CopytoPh. Book to copy the entry to the Contacts list.  
Ⅲ
Erase to erase the selected contact.  
Ⅲ
AddContact to add a new contact.  
Ⅲ
EraseR-LinkList to erase the Ready Link List.  
(See page 153 for details.)  
Ⅲ
Help to view the Ready Link instruction page.  
3. Highlight Edit and press  
4. Select the field you want to edit (Name or R-LinkNumber), and  
press  
.
.
5. Edit the entry, press OK (left softkey), and press Save (left  
softkey) to save your changes.  
Section 2J: Using Ready Link  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing a Group inYour Personal Group List  
Toeditagroupname:  
1. Press R-Link (left softkey) or  
.
2. Press Goto (left softkey), highlight PersonalGrps., and press  
.
3. Scroll to the group entry you want to edit and press Options  
(right softkey).  
Ⅲ
Edit to edit the selected group.  
Ⅲ
EraseGroup to erase the selected group.  
Ⅲ
AddGroup to add a new group.  
Ⅲ
EraseR-LinkList to erase the Ready Link List.  
(See page 153 for details.)  
Ⅲ
Help to view the Ready Link instruction page.  
4. Highlight Edit and press  
.
5. Edit the group name and press  
or OK (left softkey).  
Tip: If you don’t need to edit the group name, press Next (left softkey) during step  
5 above and skip step 6.  
6. Press Save (left softkey) to save your changes.  
7. To edit a group member, scroll to the contact you want to edit  
and press Options (right softkey).  
Ⅲ
Edit to edit a group member’s name and phone number.  
Ⅲ
Erase to erase the group member.  
Ⅲ
AddNew to add a new group member.  
Ⅲ
Add(Personal) to add a new group member from the  
Personal List.  
Ⅲ
Details to display a group member’s information.  
8. Highlight Edit and press  
9. Select the field you want to edit (Name or R-LinkNumber) and  
press  
.
.
10. Edit the entry, press OK (left softkey), and press Save (left  
softkey) to save your changes.  
11. Press Update (left softkey) to update your Personal Group List.  
Section 2J: Using Ready Link  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Erasing Ready Link List Entries  
Erasing an Entry inYour Personal List or Personal  
Group List  
Toeraseacontactoragroup:  
1. From the Ready Link List, press Goto (left softkey), highlight  
PersonalList or PersonalGrps., and press  
.
2. Scroll to the entry you want to erase and press Options (right  
softkey).  
3. Highlight Erase and press  
.
Ⅲ
EraseGroup appears when you select Personal Grps.  
4. Select Yes and press  
Toeraseagroupmember:  
1. From the Ready Link List, press Goto (left softkey), highlight  
PersonalGrps., and press  
.
.
2. Scroll to your desired group and press  
to display the group  
members.  
3. Select the contact you want to erase and press Options (right  
softkey).  
4. Highlight Erase and press  
5. Select Yes and press  
6. Press Update (left softkey) to update your Personal Group List.  
.
.
Section 2J: Using Ready Link  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Erasing a Ready Link List  
You can erase all entries saved in the Ready Link List.  
ToeraseaReadyLinkList:  
1. From the Ready Link List, press Options (right softkey).  
2. Highlight EraseR-LinkList and press  
.
3. Select your desired option and press  
.
Ⅲ
Outgoing to erase all outgoing Ready Link calls.  
Incoming to erase all incoming Ready Link calls.  
Missed to erase all missed Ready Link calls.  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
AllCalls to erase all Ready Link call history, except redial.  
AllPersonalEnt to erase all entries in Personal List and  
Personal Grps. You are prompted to enter your 4-digit lock  
code.  
4. Select Yes and press  
.
Tip: The Redial number will not be erased.  
UpdatingYour Ready Link Lists  
Updating the Personal Lists  
ToupdateyourPersonalListsmanuallythroughtheReadyLink  
server:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select ReadyLink and press  
4. Select ListUpdate and press  
.
.
.
Section 2J: Using Ready Link  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Managing Ready Link Settings  
Assigning Speed Dialing for Ready Link Entries  
ToassignSpeedDialingforReadyLinkentries:  
1. Press  
2. Select Contacts and press  
3. Select SpeedDial#s and press  
to access the main menu.  
.
.
4. Select an unassigned number and press  
.
Ⅲ
When you highlight an assigned number and press  
,
you’ll be asked whether you want to overwrite the assigned  
number. Select Yes or No, or you can also select Unassign to  
cancel the stored speed dial.  
5. Press Goto (left softkey), highlight the list from which you want  
to set a speed dial (PersonalList, or PersonalGrps.) and press  
.
6. Select the contact and press  
.
– or –  
Select the group and press , select an option, and press  
.
Ⅲ
Assign to assign the selected group as a speed dial.  
Ⅲ
Details to display the group details. You can select the group  
member from the group list.  
TouseSpeedDialforaReadyLinkentry:  
ᮣ
From standby mode, press the appropriate key and press and  
hold  
.
Restarting the Ready Link Service  
TorestarttheReadyLinkservice:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select ReadyLink and press  
.
4. Select Restart and press  
.
Section 2J: Using Ready Link  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Ready Link Guard  
This feature enables you to display the warning message when you  
cannot receive Ready Link calls. The warning message will appear  
when you are launching Media Player, a Web or Java application, or  
sending/uploading your pictures and videos.  
TosettheReadyLinkGuard:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select ReadyLink and press  
.
4. Select R-LinkGuard and press . (A message will appear.)  
5. Press OK (left softkey) to continue.  
6. Select On and press  
.
Ⅲ
To deactivate this feature, select Off during step 6 above.  
Setting RingerTypes for Ready Link Calls  
Your phone provides a variety of ringer types that allow you to  
customize your ringer and volume settings.  
ToselectaringertypeforReadyLinkcalls:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select ReadyLink and press  
4. Select Sounds and press  
.
.
.
5. Select RingerType and press  
6. Select ReadyLinkCalls, R-LinkMissed, or R-LinkFloorTone, and  
press  
.
.
7. Scroll to your desired ringer type and press  
.
Ⅲ
To confirm the ringer, press Play (right softkey) during step  
6 above.  
Tip: You can change the ringer type in another way (see “Selecting Ringer Types  
for Ready Link Calls” on page 39).  
Section 2J: Using Ready Link  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting an Alert Notification for Ready Link Calls  
Your phone can alert you with an audible tone when you receive a  
Ready Link call.  
TosetalertsforReadyLinkcalls:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select ReadyLink and press  
4. Select Sounds and press  
.
.
.
5. Select Alerts and press  
.
6. Select ReadyLinkCalls or R-LinkMissed and press  
.
7. Select Once or RepeatAlert and press  
.
Ⅲ
To deactivate R-Link Missed alert, select Off during step  
7 above.  
Tip: You can set alerts in another way (see “Alert Notification” on page 43).  
Setting the Speakerphone for Ready Link Calls  
You can set the speakerphone on or off when Ready Link call is  
activated. By default, the speakerphone is set to on.  
Tosetthespeakerphoneonoroff:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select ReadyLink and press  
.
4. Select Speakerphone and press  
5. Select On or Off and press  
Note: If the phone’s ringer volume is set to Vibrate, Ringer off, or Silence All, the  
.
.
speakerphone turns off. Press to turn the speakerphone mode on.  
Section 2J: Using Ready Link  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the DefaultView of the Ready Link List  
You can select the default Ready Link List when Ready Link is  
launched.  
ToselectthedefaultviewoftheReadyLinkList:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select ReadyLink and press  
.
4. Select DefaultView and press . (The available lists appear.)  
5. Select your desired list and press  
.
Setting the Floor Display of the Ready Link Calls  
With this feature, you can select the floor display during a Ready Link  
calls.  
Toselectthefloordisplay:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select ReadyLink and press  
.
4. Select FloorDisplay and press  
.
5. Select TextOnly or Text&Image and press  
.
Ⅲ
To see a display preview of the image, select Text&Image  
and press Preview (right softkey) during step 5 above  
(Main LCD only).  
Section 2J: Using Ready Link  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 2K  
Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
In This Section  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
TakingPictures  
StoringPicturesinMyPictures  
TakingVideos  
StoringVideosinMyVideos  
SM  
SendingSprintPCSPictureMail andSprintPCSVideoMail  
SM  
ManagingSprintPCSPictureMail  
YourSanyoSCP-7400Phone’sbuilt-incameragivesyoutheabilitytotake  
full-colordigitalpictures, viewyourpicturesusingthephone’sdisplay,  
andinstantlysendthemtoyourfamilyandfriends. It’s fun and as easy to  
use as a traditional point-and-click camera: just take a picture, view  
it on your phone’s display, and send it from your phone to up to ten  
people. In addition to taking pictures, you can also take, view, and  
send videos to your friends and family with your built-in camera.  
This section explains the features and options of your phone’s built-  
in camera.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Taking Pictures  
Taking pictures with your phone’s built-in camera is as simple as  
choosing a subject, pointing the lens, and pressing a button. You can  
activate camera mode and take pictures whether the phone is open  
or closed.  
Totakeapicturewiththeflipopen:  
1. Press  
2. Select Picture&Video and press  
3. Select Camera and press to activate camera mode.  
to access the main menu.  
.
(Additional options are available through the camera mode  
Options menu. See “Camera Mode Options” on page 161 for  
more information.)  
Shortcut: To activate camera mode, you can also press and hold  
side camera key (see illustration on page 9).  
or the  
4. Using the phone’s main LCD as a viewfinder, aim the camera  
lens at your subject.  
5. To take the picture, press  
,
, Capture (left softkey), or the  
Side Camera key. (The picture will be saved automatically in  
your In Camera folder.)  
Ⅲ
To return to camera mode to take another picture, press  
.
6. Press Next (right softkey) for more options:  
Ⅲ
SendPicture to send the picture to up to 10 contacts at one  
time. (See page 183 for details.)  
Ⅲ
UploadtoAlbums to upload the picture you just took to the  
Sprint PCS Picture Mail Website. Depending on your  
settings, you may be prompted to accept a Sprint PCS Vision  
connection.  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
SetasPictureID to assign the picture as a Picture ID.  
SetasScrnSaver to assign the picture as a Screen Saver.  
GotoCamera to return to camera mode to take another  
picture.  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
PicsInCamera to go to the In Camera folder to review your  
saved pictures.  
Delete to delete the picture you just took.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Totakeapicturewiththeflipclosed:  
1. Press and hold the side camera key to activate camera mode.  
2. Point the camera lens at your subject. (You can check the  
picture framing through the Sub LCD.)  
Note: When taking a picture with the flip closed, the subject image appears in  
reverse on the external display. The captured image will not be saved in reverse.  
3. Press the side camera key to take the picture. (The picture will  
be saved automatically in your In Camera folder.)  
Ⅲ
Open the flip to review the picture and for more options.  
Note: While you are taking a picture, the backlight turns on even if your backlight  
is set to Always Off.  
Note: In some cases, the screen may flicker and the stripes may appear on the  
display under fluorescent lighting.  
SM  
CreatingYour Sprint PCS Picture Mail Password  
The first time you use any of the Sprint PCS Picture Mail management  
options involving the Sprint PCS Picture Mail Website, you will need to  
establish a Sprint PCS Picture Mail password through your wireless  
phone. This password will also allow you to sign in to the Sprint PCS  
Picture Mail Website at http://pictures.qwest.com to access and manage  
your uploaded pictures, videos, and albums.  
TocreateyourSprintPCSPictureMailpassword:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Picture&Video and press  
.
.
3. Select OnlineAlbums and press  
4. Select ViewAlbums and press . (You will be prompted to  
create a pictures password.)  
5. Enter a four- to eight-digit password and press  
or OK (left  
softkey).  
6. Please wait while the system creates your account.  
Tip: Write down your Sprint PCS Picture Mail password in a secure place.  
Once your account has been successfully registered, you may upload  
and send pictures and videos, and access the Sprint PCS Picture Mail  
Website.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Camera Mode Options  
Several options are available from camera mode.  
Press Options (right softkey) to display additional camera options:  
ⅷ
Flash to activate the flash. (See “Setting the Flash” on page 162 for  
details.)  
ⅷ
Self-timer to activate the camera’s timer. (See “Setting the  
Self-timer” on page 162 for details.)  
ⅷ
FunTools to select an option from the following:  
Ⅲ
FunFrames to select your favorite fun picture frame to  
decorate your picture.  
Ⅲ
MultipleShots to take multiple shots. (See “Taking Multiple  
Shots” on page 163 for details.)  
Ⅲ
ColorTone to select a wide variety of color tones for the  
picture (Normal, Sepia, Black&White, Negative, Posterization,  
Emboss, or Drawing).  
ⅷ
ImageControls to select an option from the following:  
Ⅲ
Brightness to select Auto or Manual brightness control. If you  
select Manual, use your navigation key to select a setting and  
press  
to apply the desired setting.  
Ⅲ
WhiteBalance to adjust white balance based on changing  
conditions. Select from Auto, Sunny, Cloudy, Tungsten,  
Fluorescent, or Manual.  
Shortcut: To change the White Balance, press the navigation key up or down in  
camera mode.  
ⅷ
CameraSettings to select Resolution, Quality, ShutterSound,  
NightMode, FullScreen, or AutoDelete. (See “Selecting Camera  
Settings” on page 165 for details.)  
ⅷ
PicsInCamera to go to your phone’s In Camera folder. (See “In  
Camera Folder” on page 168 for details.)  
ⅷ
GotoCamcorder to switch to video mode. (See “Taking Videos” on  
page 173 for details.)  
ⅷ
KeyGuidance to indicate the key functions in camera mode.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SettingtheFlash  
Toactivatetheflash:  
1. From camera mode, press Options (right softkey).  
2. Highlight Flash and press  
.
3. Select an option from the following and press  
.
Ⅲ
OnThisShot to activate the flash for one shot.  
Ⅲ
OnAlways to activate the flash all the time.  
Ⅲ
Auto to activate the flash automatically.  
4. Take a picture using the phone’s main LCD as a viewfinder.  
Ⅲ
To deactivate this feature, select Off during step 3 above.  
Tip: When the phone is open and in camera mode, press  
between flash modes.  
to switch  
SettingtheSelf-timer  
ToactivatetheSelf-timer:  
1. From camera mode, press Options (right softkey).  
2. Highlight Self-timer and press  
.
3. Highlight the length of delay you want the timer to use  
(10seconds or 5seconds) and press . (The icon appears on  
the lower left portion of the main LCD.)  
4. Press Start (left softkey) when you are ready to start the timer.  
5. Get ready for the picture. (When the timer is down to three  
seconds, the Self-timer icon will turn red [ ] and the phone  
will begin to beep.)  
Note: After taking a picture, Self-timer settings return to off.  
TocanceltheSelf-timerafterithasstarted:  
ᮣ
Press Cancel (right softkey).  
Note: While the Self-timer is active, all keys are disabled except  
and Cancel (right softkey).  
,
,
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TakingMultipleShots  
This feature allows you to take up to 9 continuous shots of one  
moment. When you take multiple shots, the icon will appear in  
the viewfinder.  
Totakemultipleshots:  
1. From camera mode, press Options (right softkey).  
2. Highlight FunTools and press  
3. Highlight MultipleShots and press  
Note: If your phone’s memory is full, the “Multiple Shots”option will not appear.  
.
.
4. Select your desired option from the following and press  
.
Ⅲ
3Shots to take series of 3 shots.  
Ⅲ
6Shots to take series of 6 shots. (Only appears when the  
resolution setting is Low or Medium.)  
Ⅲ
9Shots to take series of 9 shots. (Only appears when the  
resolution setting is Low.)  
5. Select the duration of the interval between shots from  
Normal or Fast and press  
.
6. To take the pictures, press  
. (The Multiple Shots folder will  
display up to nine thumbnail pictures per screen.)  
Ⅲ
To deactivate this feature, select Off during step 4 above.  
Tip: After taking multiple shots, the pictures are automatically saved in the  
In Camera folder. (See “In Camera Folder” on page 168for details.)  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When you are in the Multiple Shots folder, several options are available.  
Press Options (right softkey) to display the following options:  
ⅷ
UploadtoAlbums to upload pictures saved in your phone to the  
Sprint PCS Picture Mail Website.  
ⅷ
SetasPictureID to display the picture as a Picture ID.  
ⅷ
SetasScrnSaver to display the picture as a screen saver.  
ⅷ
GotoCamera to activate camera mode.  
ⅷ
PicsInCamera to access the In Camera folder.  
ⅷ
Delete to delete pictures in the In Camera folder.  
ⅷ
Slideshow to display your pictures as a slideshow. (Only appears  
when you have two or more pictures in the folder.)  
ⅷ
InfoBar to display information on the currently highlighted  
picture. (Expanded picture only)  
ⅷ
Thumbnail/Expand to switch the display from full-screen to  
thumbnail view (up to nine pictures per screen).  
Tip: You can also switch the thumbnail view to the expanded display by pressing  
and holding . To go back to thumbnail view, press  
.
ⅷ
FullScreen to display the currently highlighted picture to the full  
screen view without any icons.  
Tip: To switch the full screen view, press  
.
UsingtheZoom  
This feature allows you to zoom in on an object when you take a  
picture. Depending on your resolution settings, you can adjust the  
zoom from 1-step to 20-step.  
Tousethezoom:  
1. From camera mode, press the navigation key right or left, or the  
side volume key up or down to adjust the zoom. (The gauge bar  
appears.)  
2. Press  
to take the picture. (The picture will be saved  
automatically in your In Camera folder.)  
Note: The Zoom gauge will not appear when the Resolution setting is High.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting Camera Settings  
Toselectyourcamerasettings:  
1. From camera mode, press Options (right softkey).  
2. Highlight CameraSettings and press  
.
3. Select an option from the following and press  
.
Ⅲ
Resolution to select a file size (High, Medium, or Low) for a  
picture.  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
Quality to select Economy, Normal, or Fine picture quality.  
ShutterSound to select a shutter sound. (See “Setting the  
Shutter Sound” below for details.)  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
NightMode to select On for taking pictures in low light.  
FullScreen to expand the display to the full screen view  
without any icons (except the flash icon).  
Ⅲ
AutoDelete to set the auto delete function. (See “Setting  
Auto Delete” on page 166 for details.)  
SettingtheShutterSound  
ToselecttheShutterSound:  
1. From camera mode, press Options (right softkey).  
2. Select CameraSettings and press  
.
3. Select ShutterSound and press  
.
4. Select an option from the following and press  
.
Ⅲ
Default plays the default shutter sound.  
Ⅲ
Say“Cheez” plays a recording of the phrase “Say Cheez.”  
Ⅲ
Off makes no sound.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SettingAutoDelete  
With this feature, pictures that have been uploaded to your online  
Sprint PCS Picture Mail account will be erased automatically from  
your phone.  
TosetAutoDelete:  
1. From camera mode, press Options (right softkey).  
2. Highlight CameraSettings and press  
3. Highlight AutoDelete and press  
.
.
4. Select Yes and press  
to activate auto delete.  
Ⅲ
To deactivate this feature, select No during step 4 above.  
Note: You can also set this function in video mode. From video mode, press  
Options (right softkey), select Camcord.Settings, and follow steps 3-4 above.  
ViewingYour Camera’s StatusArea Display  
CameraStatusArea  
Taken/Remained  
4/ 152  
number of pictures  
Memory Gauge  
Resolution  
Flash  
White Balance  
Brightness  
Night Mode  
Multiple Shots  
( V i e w f i n d e r )  
Self-Timer  
5s  
Capture  
Options  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CameraIconIndication  
No.  
Function  
Icons  
Details  
To use the flash for only one shot.  
OnThis Shot  
To use a flash every time you take a picture.  
To use the auto flash function.  
On Always  
Auto  
Flash  
1
Use this setting for sunny weather.  
Sunny  
Cloudy  
Use this setting for cloudy weather.  
Use this setting for standard household lighting.  
Use this setting for fluorescent lighting.  
White  
Tungsten  
Fluorescent  
Manual  
Manual  
2
Balance  
For the manual setting of white balance.  
For the manual setting of brightness.  
Use this setting in low light.  
Brightness  
3
4
5
Night Mode  
Use this setting for Multiple Shots.  
For high picture resolution.  
Multiple Shots  
High  
Resolution Medium  
Low  
For medium picture resolution.  
For low picture resolution.  
6
Shows the remaining memory.  
The number of stored pictures.  
Memory Gauge  
Picture Number  
Remaining Pictures  
Self-timer  
7
8
9
The number of pictures you can take with the  
current resolution.  
Numeric countdown will appear when the  
self timer has been activated.  
5s  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storing Pictures in My Pictures  
My Pictures is your phone’s picture storage area. There are two types  
of folders in My Pictures that can be used separately according to  
your needs. They are:  
ⅷ
InCamera (see below)  
ⅷ
SavedtoPhone (see page 171)  
In Camera Folder  
Once a picture is taken, it is automatically saved to the folder called  
“In Camera.” From the In Camera folder, you can view all the pictures  
you have taken, store selected images in your phone, send pictures to  
the Sprint PCS Picture Mail Website, delete images, and access  
additional picture options.  
ToreviewyourstoredpicturesintheInCamerafolder:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Picture&Video and press  
.
3. Select MyPictures and press  
.
4. Select InCamera and press . (Thumbnail pictures will display,  
up to nine pictures at a time.)  
5. Use your navigation key to view and scroll through pictures.  
In Camera Folder Options  
When you are in the In Camera folder, several options are available.  
Press Options (right softkey) to display the following options:  
ⅷ
UploadtoAlbums to upload pictures saved in your phone to the  
Sprint PCS Picture Mail Website. Depending on your settings, you  
may be prompted to accept a Sprint PCS Vision connection.  
Choose one from the following options:  
Ⅲ
ThisPicture to upload the currently highlighted picture.  
Ⅲ
SelectedPictures to upload the selected pictures. Press  
select a picture (the check box on the lower right corner  
will be marked).  
to  
Ⅲ
AllPictures to upload all the pictures in the In Camera folder.  
Note: Erasing pictures will free up memory space in your phone to enable you to  
take more pictures. Once erased, pictures cannot be uploaded to your online  
Sprint PCS Picture Mail account or saved to the Saved to Phone folder.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ⅷ
ⅷ
SetasPictureID to display the currently highlighted picture for  
incoming calls from a specific Contacts List entry. Select your  
desired entry and press  
SetasScrnSaver to display the currently highlighted picture as a  
screen saver. Select MainLCD or SubLCD and press  
.
.
Note: Assigned pictures will be copied automatically to the Saved to Phone  
folder with the icon.  
ⅷ
Details/Edit to select an option from the following:  
Ⅲ
TextCaption to edit the caption of a currently highlighted  
picture.  
Ⅲ
PictureInfo to display information on the currently  
highlighted picture, such as caption, time/date, size, etc.  
Ⅲ
ColorTone to select a wide variety of color tones for the  
picture (Sepia, Black&White, Negative, Posterization,  
Emboss, Painting, or Drawing).  
Ⅲ
RotatePicture to rotate the currently highlighted picture.  
To rotate, press the navigation key right or left, or Rotate  
(right softkey).  
ⅷ
Delete to delete pictures in the In Camera folder. Select ThisPicture,  
SelectedPictures, or AllPictures.  
ⅷ
SavetoPhone to save the selected pictures in the Saved to Phone  
folder.  
ⅷ
SortbyDate to sort pictures by date. (Thumbnail pictures only.)  
Select Taken-Descending, Taken-Ascending, Uploaded-Descend, or  
Uploaded-Ascend.  
ⅷ
Slideshow to display your pictures as a slideshow. (Only appears  
when you have two or more pictures in the folder.)  
ⅷ
InfoBar to display information on the selected picture, such as  
folder name, picture number, caption, etc. Select On to display  
the caption of a picture; select Off to hide the information.  
(Expanded picture only.)  
Tip: From expanded picture display, press the navigation key up or down to hide  
or display the Info Bar.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ⅷ
ⅷ
Thumbnail/Expand to switch the display from full-screen to  
thumbnail view (up to nine pictures per screen).  
FullScreen to display the currently highlighted picture to the full  
screen view without any icons and info bar.  
ⅷ
ⅷ
GotoSavedtoPh. to access the Saved to Phone folder.  
GotoCamera to activate camera mode.  
Note: Save to Phone and Upload copy pictures from your phone’s In Camera  
folder to your Saved to Phone folder or your online Sprint PCS Picture Mail  
account. Pictures that have been stored to your Saved to Phone folder or  
uploaded to your online account will remain available in the In Camera folder  
until you erase them.  
Note: If this is the first time you have accessed the Sprint PCS Picture Mail  
account, you will be prompted to create your Sprint PCS Picture Mail password.  
(See “Creating Your Sprint PCS Picture Mail Password” on page 160.)  
InCameraFolder  
Folder name  
Uploaded icon  
Count of Saved Pictures  
Current Picture number  
In Camera  
1/9  
2nd  
3rd  
Latest  
latest  
latest  
4th  
5th  
6th  
latest  
latest  
latest  
Check Box  
7th  
8th  
9th  
latest  
latest  
latest  
Caption  
left softkey  
Title-1  
Send  
Options  
right softkey  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saved to Phone Folder  
When you assign or download a picture, the picture will be saved  
automatically to the separate folder called “Saved to Phone.”  
The Saved to Phone folder allows you to store copies of pictures on  
your phone and to assign pictures to various phone tasks.  
TosaveapicturetotheSavedtoPhonefolder:  
1. From the In Camera folder (see “In Camera Folder” on page 168),  
select a picture you wish to save to the Saved to Phone folder  
and press . (You may select multiple pictures.)  
Tip: If there is no selected picture, the currently highlighted picture will be selected.  
2. Press Options (right softkey). (The In Camera folder options will  
display.)  
3. Highlight SavetoPhone and press . (A copy of the picture will  
be saved to the Saved to Phone folder.)  
ToviewpicturesstoredintheSavedtoPhonefolder:  
1. Press  
2. Select Picture&Video and press  
Shortcut: Instead of steps 1 and 2 above, press  
to access the main menu.  
.
.
3. Select MyPictures and press  
.
4. Select SavedtoPhone and press . (Thumbnail pictures will  
display, up to nine pictures at a time.)  
5. Use your navigation key to view and scroll through pictures.  
Tip: To switch the thumbnail view and expanded view, press the left softkey.  
Tip: From the expanded view, press and hold the navigation key right or left to  
display the stored picture continuously.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saved to Phone Folder Options  
From the Saved to Phone folder, press Options (right softkey) to display  
the following options. To select an option, highlight it and press  
.
ⅷ
SetasPictureID to display the currently highlighted picture for  
incoming calls from a specific Contacts List entry.  
ⅷ
SetasScrnSaver to display the currently highlighted picture as a  
screen saver. Select MainLCD or SubLCD and press  
.
ⅷ
Details/Edit to display the currently highlighted picture’s details or  
edit the pictures. You can select from TextCaption, PictureInfo,  
ColorTone, or RotatePicture.  
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
Delete to delete pictures stored in the Saved to Phone folder.  
Select ThisPicture, SelectedPictures, or AllPictures.  
SortbyDate to sort pictures by date. (Thumbnail picture only.)  
Select Saved-Descending, or Saved-Ascending.  
Slideshow to display your pictures as a slideshow. (Only appears  
when you have two or more pictures in the folder.)  
InfoBar to display information on the currently highlighted  
picture, such as folder name, picture number, caption, etc.  
(Expanded picture only.)  
ⅷ
FullScreen to display the currently highlighted picture to the full  
screen view without any icons and info bar.  
ⅷ
ⅷ
PicsInCamera to access the In Camera folder.  
GotoCamera to activate camera mode.  
Note: Pictures may be assigned to more than one task.  
Note: Assigned pictures will be identified with the icon.  
SavedtoPhoneFolder  
Folder name  
Count of Saved Pictures  
Current Picture number  
Saved toPhone 1/9  
2nd  
3rd  
Latest  
latest  
latest  
4th  
5th  
6th  
Assigned icon  
latest  
latest  
latest  
Check Box  
7th  
8th  
9th  
latest  
latest  
latest  
Caption  
Title-1  
Expand  
Options  
left softkey  
right softkey  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Taking Videos  
In addition to taking pictures, you can also record, view, and send  
videos to your friends and family with your built-in camcorder.  
Totakeavideowiththeflipopen:  
1. Press  
2. Select Picture&Video and Press  
Shortcut: Instead of steps 1 and 2 above, press  
to access the main menu.  
.
.
3. Select Camcorder and press  
to activate video mode.  
(Additional options are available through the video mode  
“Options” menu. See “Video Mode Options” on page 174 for  
more information.)  
4. Using the phone’s main LCD as a viewfinder, aim the camera  
lens at your subject.  
5. Press  
,
, Record (left softkey), or the Side Camera key to  
start recording. (Maximum recording time is 30 seconds.)  
Tip: To pause the recording, press  
or Pause (left softkey).  
6. Press  
, Stop (right softkey), or the Side Camera key to stop  
recording. (The picture will be saved automatically in your In  
Camcorder folder.)  
Ⅲ
To return to video mode to take another video, press  
.
7. Press Next (right softkey) for more options:  
Ⅲ
SendVideo to send the video. (See page 185 for details.)  
Ⅲ
UploadtoAlbums to upload the video you just took to the  
Sprint PCS Picture Mail Website. Depending on your  
settings, you may be prompted to accept a Sprint PCS Vision  
connection.  
Ⅲ
SetasRinger to display the video for incoming calls.  
Select VoiceCalls or PhoneBook and press  
.
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
GotoCamcorder to return to video mode to take another video.  
VideosInCamcord. to go to the In Camcorder folder to review  
your saved videos.  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
Playback to play back the video you just took.  
Delete to delete the video you just took.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Totakeavideowiththeflipclosed:  
1. Press and hold the side camera key to activate camera mode.  
2. Press and hold the side camera key to activate video mode.  
3. Point the camera lens at your subject. (You can check the video  
framing through the Sub LCD.)  
Note: When taking a video with the phone closed, the subject image appears in  
reverse on the external display. The captured image will not be saved in reverse.  
4. Press the side camera key to start recording. (Maximum  
recording time is 30 seconds.)  
5. Press the Side Camera key to stop recording. (Your video will be  
saved automatically in the In Camcorder folder.)  
Ⅲ
Open the flip to review the video and for more options.  
Note: While you are recording a video, the backlight turns on even if your  
backlight is set to Always Off.  
Note: In some cases, the screen may flicker and the stripes may appear on the  
display under fluorescent lighting.  
Video Mode Options  
Several options are available from video mode.  
Press Options (right softkey) to display additional options:  
ⅷ
VideoLight to select a Video Light setting. Select On to light the  
Video Light while taking video.  
ⅷ
Self-timer to activate the camera’s timer function. (See “Setting  
the Self-timer” on page 162 for details.)  
ⅷ
ImageControls to select an option from the following:  
Ⅲ
Brightness to select Auto or Manual brightness control. If you  
select Manual, press the navigation key right (increase) or  
left (decrease) to select a setting and press to apply the  
desired setting.  
Ⅲ
WhiteBalance to adjust white balance based on changing  
conditions. Select from Auto, Sunny, Cloudy, Tungsten,  
Fluorescent, or Manual.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ⅷ
Camcord.Settings to select Resolution, VideoQuality, SilentMovie,  
CueSound, NightMode, SkinFrames, or AutoDelete. (See “Selecting  
Camcorder Settings” on page 176 for details.)  
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
VideosInCamcord. to go to your phone’s In Camcorder folder. (See  
“In Camcorder Folder” on page 178 for details.)  
GotoCamera to switch to camera mode. (See “Taking Pictures” on  
page 159 for details.)  
KeyGuidance to indicate the key functions in video mode.  
UsingtheZoom  
This feature allows you to zoom in on an object when you record a  
video. Depending on your resolution settings, you can adjust the  
zoom from 1-step to 18-step.  
Tousethezoom:  
1. From video mode, press the navigation key right or left, or the  
side volume key up or down to adjust the zoom. (The gauge bar  
appears.)  
2. Press  
to start recording.  
3. Press  
to stop recording. (The video will be saved  
automatically in your In Camcorder folder.)  
Tip: The zoom function is also available while recording.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting Camcorder Settings  
Toselectyourcamcordersettings:  
1. From video mode, press Options (right softkey).  
2. Highlight Camcord.Settings and press  
.
3. Select an option from the following and press  
.
Ⅲ
Resolution to select a file size (Good, or Medium) for a video.  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
VideoQuality to select Video quality from Economy, Normal,  
or Rich.  
SilentMovie to select On to record without sounds. Select Off  
to deactivate this feature.  
CueSound to select a cue sound. (See “Setting the Cue Sound”  
below for details.)  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
NightMode to take videos in low light.  
SkinFrames to select your favorite frame from MovieBorder  
or LineBorder. (This option doesn’t appear when Resolution  
setting is Good.)  
Ⅲ
AutoDelete to set auto delete. (See “Setting Auto Delete” on  
page 166 for details.)  
Note: Recording time varies depending on the Video Quality.  
(Economy: 30 seconds, Normal: 20 seconds, Rich: 15 seconds.)  
SettingtheCueSound  
ToselecttheCueSound:  
1. From video mode, press Options (right softkey).  
2. Highlight Camcord.Settings and press  
3. Select CueSound and press  
.
.
4. Select an option from the following and press  
.
Ⅲ
Default plays the default cue sound.  
Ⅲ
“Action&Cut” notifies you with the pre-recorded words.  
Ⅲ
Off makes no sound.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ViewingYourVideo’s StatusArea Display  
VideoStatusArea  
Taken/Remained  
5/ 21  
number of videos  
Memory Gauge  
Resolution  
Video Light  
White Balance  
Brightness  
Night Mode  
( V i e w f i n d e r )  
Recording  
Gauge  
Elapsed Time Display  
Self-Timer  
5s  
Cancel  
VideoIconIndication  
No.  
1
Function  
Icons  
Details  
Appears when the Video Light setting is On.  
Video Light  
Same as Camera Status Area.(See page 167 for details.)  
For the manual setting of brightness.  
Use this setting in low light.  
White Balance  
Brightness Manual  
Night Mode  
2
3
4
5
For displaying the recording time.  
For good picture resolution.  
Recording Gauge  
Good  
Resolution  
6
7
8
For medium picture resolution.  
Shows the remaining memory.  
Medium  
Memory Gauge  
Picture Number  
Remaining Pictures  
Self-timer  
The number of stored pictures.  
The amount of videos you can take with  
current resolution.  
Numeric countdown will appear during  
the self-timer countdown.  
5s  
9
For displaying the elapsed time of recording.  
Elapsed Time Display  
10  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
StoringVideos in MyVideos  
My Videos is your phone’s picture storage area. Same as My Pictures,  
there are two types of folders in My Videos that can be used separately  
according to your needs. They are:  
ⅷ
In Camcorder (see below)  
ⅷ
Saved to Phone (see page 181)  
In Camcorder Folder  
Once a video is taken, it is automatically saved to the folder called  
“In Camcorder.” From the In Camcorder folder, you can view all the  
videos you have recorded, store selected images in your phone, send  
videos to the Sprint PCS Picture Mail Website, delete images, and  
access additional video options.  
ToreviewyourstoredvideosintheInCamcorderfolder:  
1. Press  
2. Select Picture&Video and Press  
3. Select MyVideos and press  
to access the main menu.  
.
.
4. Select InCamcorder and press . (Thumbnail videos will  
display, up to nine videos at a time.)  
5. Use your navigation key to view and scroll through videos.  
6. Press Play (left softkey) to play the video.  
Tip: Press the Side Volume key up or down to adjust the video volume while  
playing or pausing a video.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Camcorder Folder Options  
When you are in the In Camcorder folder, several options are available.  
Press Options (right softkey) to display the following options:  
ⅷ
SendVideo to send video files. See page 185 for details.  
ⅷ
UploadtoAlbums to select an option from the following to upload  
videos saved in the In Camcorder folder to the Sprint PCS Picture  
Mail Website. Depending on your settings, you may be prompted  
to accept a Sprint PCS Vision connection.  
Ⅲ
ThisVideo to upload the currently highlighted video.  
Ⅲ
SelectedVideos to upload the selected videos. Press  
to  
select a video (the check box on the lower right corner will  
be marked).  
Ⅲ
AllVideos to upload all the videos in the In Camcorder folder.  
Note: Erasing videos will free up memory space in your phone to enable you to  
take more videos. Once erased, videos cannot be uploaded to your online  
Sprint PCS Picture Mail account or saved to the Saved to Phone folder.  
ⅷ
SetasRinger to display the currently highlighted video for  
incoming calls from a specific Contacts List entry. Select an  
option from the following and press  
.
Ⅲ
VoiceCalls to display the video for incoming calls. Select  
WithCallerID or NoCallerID and press  
.
Ⅲ
PhoneBook to display the video for incoming calls from a  
specific Contacts list entry. Select your desired entry and  
press  
.
ⅷ
Details/Edit to select an option from the following:  
Ⅲ
TextCaption to edit the caption of a currently highlighted  
video.  
Ⅲ
VideoInfo to display information on the currently highlighted  
video, such as caption, time/date, size, etc.  
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
Delete to delete videos in the In Camcorder folder. Select  
ThisVideo, SelectedVideos, or AllVideos.  
SavetoPhone to save the selected videos in the Saved to Phone  
folder.  
SortbyDate to sort videos by date. (Thumbnail picture only.)  
Select Taken-Descending, Taken-Ascending, Uploaded-Descend, or  
Uploaded-Ascend.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ⅷ
Thumbnail/Expand to switch the display from full-screen to  
thumbnail view (up to nine pictures per screen).  
Tip: You can also switch the thumbnail view to the expanded display by pressing  
and holding . To go back to thumbnail view, press  
.
ⅷ
GotoSavedtoPh. to access the Saved to Phone folder.  
ⅷ
GotoCamcorder to activate video mode.  
Note: Upload to Albums and Save to Phone copy videos from your phone’s In  
Camcorder folder to your Saved to Phone folder or your online Sprint PCS Picture  
Mail account. Pictures that have been stored to your Saved to Phone folder or  
uploaded to your online account will remain available in the In Camera folder  
until you erase them.  
Note: If this is the first time you have accessed the Sprint PCS Picture Mail  
account, you will be prompted to create your Sprint PCS Picture Mail password.  
(See “Creating Your Sprint PCS Picture Mail Password” on page 160.)  
InCamcorderFolder  
Folder name  
Uploaded icon  
Count of Saved Videos  
Current Video number  
In Camcorder 1/9  
2nd  
3rd  
Latest  
latest  
latest  
4th  
5th  
6th  
latest  
latest  
latest  
Check Box  
7th  
8th  
9th  
latest  
latest  
latest  
Caption  
left softkey  
Title-1  
Play  
Options  
right softkey  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saved to Phone Folder (Video)  
When you assign or download a video, the video will be saved  
automatically to the separate folder called “Saved to Phone.”  
The Saved to Phone folder allows you to store copies of videos on  
your phone and to assign videos to various phone tasks.  
TosaveavideototheSavedtoPhonefolder:  
1. From the In Camcorder folder (see “In Camcorder Folder” on  
page 178), select a video you wish to save to the Saved to Phone  
folder and press . (You may select multiple videos.)  
Tip: If there is no selected video, the currently highlighted video will be selected.  
2. Press Options (right softkey). (The In Camcorder folder options  
will display.)  
3. Highlight SavetoPhone and press . (A copy of the video will  
be saved to the Saved to Phone folder.)  
ToplayvideosstoredintheSavedtoPhonefolder:  
1. Press  
2. Select Picture&Video and press  
3. Select MyVideos and press  
to access the main menu.  
.
.
4. Select SavedtoPhone and press . (Thumbnail pictures will  
display, up to nine videos at a time.)  
5. Use your navigation key to view and scroll through videos.  
6. Press Play (left softkey) to play the selected videos.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saved to Phone Folder Options (Video)  
From the Saved to Phone folder, press Options (right softkey) to  
display the following options. To select an option, highlight it and  
press  
.
ⅷ
SetasRinger to display the currently highlighted video for  
incoming calls from a specific Contacts List entry. Select  
VoiceCalls or PhoneBook.  
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
Details/Edit to display the currently highlighted video’s details or  
edit the pictures. You can select from TextCaption or VideoInfo.  
Delete to delete videos stored in the Saved to Phone folder.  
Select ThisVideo, SelectedVideos, or AllVideos.  
SortbyDate to sort videos by date. (Thumbnail picture only.)  
Select Saved-Descending or Saved-Ascending.  
Thumbnail/Expand to switch the display from full-screen to  
thumbnail view (up to nine pictures per screen).  
ⅷ
ⅷ
VideosinCamcord. to access the In Camcorder folder.  
GotoCamcorder to activate video mode.  
Note: Videos may be assigned to more than one task.  
Note: Assigned videos will be identified with the icon.  
SavedtoPhoneFolder  
Folder name  
Count of Saved Videos  
Current Video number  
Saved toPhone 1/9  
2nd  
3rd  
Latest  
latest  
latest  
4th  
5th  
6th  
Assigned icon  
latest  
latest  
latest  
Check Box  
7th  
8th  
9th  
latest  
latest  
latest  
Caption  
left softkey  
Title-1  
Play  
Options  
right softkey  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending Sprint PCS Picture Mail and  
Sprint PCSVideo Mail  
Once you’ve taken a picture or a video, you can use the messaging  
capabilities of your wireless phone to instantly send it to family and  
friends. You can send pictures and videos to up to ten people at a  
time using their email addresses or their wireless phone numbers.  
Sending Pictures From the In Camera Folder  
TosendpicturesfromtheInCamerafolder:  
1. Press  
to access the Picture & Video menu.  
2. Select MyPictures and press  
.
3. Select InCamera and press  
.
4. Highlight a picture you wish to send and press  
to select a  
picture. (The check box on the lower right corner will be  
marked. You can select multiple pictures.)  
Tip: If there is no selected picture, the currently highlighted picture will be selected.  
5. Press Send (left softkey). (You will see messages on the display.)  
Note: The first time you send Sprint PCS Picture Mail, you will be prompted to  
establish a Sprint PCS Picture Mail Website account and password.  
(See “Creating Your Sprint PCS Picture Mail Password” on page 160.)  
6. Press the left softkey to continue.  
7. Select Recipients and press  
.
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Select an option from the following and press  
.
Ⅲ
PhoneBookEntry to select recipients from your Contacts list.  
Highlight a recipient and press to select.  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
MobilePhone# to enter a mobile phone number directly.  
EmailAddress to enter an email address directly.  
FromRecentList to select from a list of recent Sprint PCS  
Picture Mail or messaging recipients.  
Note: The  
and  
icons next to contact’s names represent Mobile Phone and  
email. When entering a new contact, use your navigation key to select the  
correct icon for the entry. You can also select both the mobile phone number and  
email address at once by selecting  
icon.  
9. Press Next (left softkey) when you are finished selecting and  
entering recipients. (You may include up to ten recipients per  
message.)  
10. Follow the onscreen instructions to add available options.  
11. To send the picture, press the appropriate softkey.  
Tip: When you send a picture from the In Camera folder, you can also attach  
videos from the In Camcorder folder. To attach videos, highlight the box next to  
Videos and press the appropriate softkey.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SendingVideos From the In Camcorder Folder  
TosendvideosfromtheInCamcorderfolder:  
1. Press  
to access the Picture & Video menu.  
2. Select MyVideos and press  
.
3. Select InCamcorder and press  
.
4. Press  
to select a video. (The check box on the lower right  
corner will be marked. You can select multiple videos.)  
Tip: If there is no selected video, the currently highlighted video will be selected.  
5. Press Options (right softkey), select SendVideo, and press  
.
6. To complete and send the Sprint PCS Video Mail, follow  
steps 6-11 in “Sending Pictures From the In Camera Folder” on  
page 183.  
Ⅲ
To change the attached videos, select the thumbnail video  
using your navigation key and press the appropriate softkey.  
Select FromMyVideos or TakeVideo and press . After  
selecting, press Next (left softkey).  
Sending Sprint PCS Picture Mail From Messaging  
You can also send your Sprint PCS Picture Mail from your phone’s  
Messaging menu.  
TosendpicturesfromtheMessagingmenu:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
to access the Messaging menu.  
2. Select Messaging and press  
Shortcut: Press the navigation key up from standby mode to access the  
Messaging menu.  
3. Select SendMessage and press  
.
– or –  
Select PictureMail, press , select <SendMessage>, and  
press  
.
4. Select Picture and press  
.
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Select FromMyPics. and press . (The In Camera folder will  
display, up to nine thumbnail pictures per screen.)  
6. Use the navigation key to display the picture you wish to send  
and press . (You can select multiple pictures.)  
Tip: To expand a selected picture from thumbnail to full-screen, press and hold  
.
7. Press Next (left softkey). To complete and send the Sprint PCS  
Picture Mail, follow steps 6-11 in “Sending Pictures From the In  
Camera Folder” on page 183.  
Tip: If you want to take a new picture and send it, select Take Picture during  
step 5 above. Take a new picture, press Next (right softkey) and follow  
steps 6-11 in “Sending Pictures From the In Camera Folder” on page 183.  
TosendvideosfromtheMessagingmenu:  
1. Follow steps 1-3 on the previous page.  
2. Select Video and press  
.
3. Select FromMyVideos and press . (The In Camcorder folder  
will display, up to nine thumbnail videos per screen.)  
4. Use the navigation key to display the video you wish to send and  
press . (You can select multiple videos.)  
5. Press Next (right softkey). (To complete and send the Sprint PCS  
Video Mail, follow steps 6-11 in “Sending Pictures From the In  
Camera Folder” on page 183.)  
Tip: If you want to take a new video and send it, select Take Video during step 3  
above. Take a new video, press Next (right softkey) and follow steps 6-11 in  
“Sending Pictures From the In Camera Folder” on page 183.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending toVarious Destinations  
With your SCP-7400, you can select various destinations such as  
picture printing service or photo sharing service. The destinations  
will be downloaded to your phone automatically the first time you  
access the Sprint PCS Picture Mail account.  
Toselectthedestination:  
1. Press  
to access the Picture & Video menu.  
2. Select MyPictures and press  
.
3. Select InCamera and press  
.
4. Highlight a picture you wish to send and press  
to select a  
picture.  
5. Press Send (left softkey).  
6. Select the destination you want to and press  
.
Ⅲ
Select Update to update your destination list.  
7. Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the process.  
Note: Depending on the destination, the items you can send will vary. A caution  
will be displayed when you select the item you cannot send. Follow the caution to  
complete the process.  
Tip: The destination list may also appear in the Picture & Video menu.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Managing Sprint PCS Picture Mail  
Using the Sprint PCS Picture MailWebsite  
Once you have uploaded pictures and videos from your phone to  
your online Sprint PCS Picture Mail account (see “In Camera Folder”  
on page 168), you can use your personal computer to manage your  
uploaded data. From the Sprint PCS Picture Mail Website you can send  
pictures and videos, organize and move images, and do much more.  
You will also have access to picture management tools to improve  
and customize your pictures. You’ll be able to lighten, darken, crop,  
add antique effects, add comic bubbles and cartoon effects, and use  
other features to transform your pictures.  
ToaccesstheSprintPCSPictureMailWebsite:  
1. From your computer’s Internet connection, go to  
http://pictures.qwest.com.  
2. Enter your wireless phone number and Sprint PCS Picture Mail  
password to sign on. (See “Creating Your Sprint PCS Picture  
Mail Password” on page 160.)  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Managing Online Pictures FromYour Phone  
You can use your phone to manage, edit, or send pictures and videos  
you have uploaded to the Sprint PCS Picture Mail Website. (See “In  
Camera Folder Options” on page 168 and “In Camcorder Folder  
Options” on page 179 for information about uploading.)  
Toviewyouronlinepicturesfromyourphone:  
1. Press  
2. Select Picture&Video and press  
Shortcut: Instead of steps 1 and 2 above, press  
to access the main menu.  
.
.
3. Select OnlineAlbums and press  
.
4. Select ViewAlbums and press . (Depending on your settings  
you may be prompted to accept a Sprint PCS Vision connection.  
The My Uploads folder and your albums appear.)  
5. Select MyUploads or an album title and press  
.
6. Highlight Picture or Video and press . (Thumbnail pictures or  
videos, up to nine per screen are displayed.)  
Tip: To expand a selected picture or video from thumbnail to full-screen, press and  
hold  
.
7. Use your navigation key to select a picture or video.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UploadingYour Pictures andVideos  
Touploadpictures:  
1. Press  
to access the Picture & Video menu.  
2. Select OnlineAlbums and press  
.
3. Select UploadPics and press  
.
4. Select pictures and press Upload (left softkey).  
5. Highlight ThisPicture, SelectedPictures, or AllPictures and  
press  
.
6. Highlight MyUploads and press  
– or –  
.
Highlight OtherAlbums, press  
and then select your desired  
album and press  
.
Touploadvideos:  
1. Follow steps 1 and 2 above.  
2. Select UploadVideos and press  
.
3. Select videos and press Upload (left softkey).  
4. Highlight ThisVideo, SelectedVideos, or AllVideos and press  
.
5. Highlight MyUploads and press  
.
– or –  
Highlight OtherAlbums, press , and then select your desired  
album and press  
.
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DownloadingYour Online Pictures  
From the Sprint PCS Picture Mail Website, you can download the  
selected picture or video to the Saved to Phone folder. In addition to  
downloading, you can assign the picture or video to several phone  
tasks.  
Todownloadpictures:  
1. From the online picture display, select a picture you wish to  
download and press Options (right softkey). (See “Managing  
Online Pictures From Your Phone” on page 189.)  
2. Highlight SavetoPhone and press  
.
3. Select an option from the following and press  
.
Ⅲ
SetasPictureID to download and assign the currently  
highlighted picture to Picture ID.  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
SetasScrnSaver to download and assign the currently  
highlighted picture to screen saver.  
DownloadOnly to only download the pictures to the Saved to  
Phone folder.  
Todownloadvideos:  
1. From the online video display, select a video you wish to  
download and press Options (right softkey). (See “Managing  
Online Pictures From Your Phone” on page 189.)  
2. Highlight SavetoPhone and press  
.
3. Select an option from the following and press  
.
Ⅲ
SetasRinger to download and assign the currently  
highlighted video to voice calls or a Contacts entry.  
Ⅲ
DownloadOnly to only download the videos to the Saved to  
Phone folder.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending Online Sprint PCS Picture Mail  
TosendpicturesfromtheonlineAddressBook:  
1. From the online picture display, select a picture you wish to  
send and press Send (left softkey). (See “Managing Online  
Pictures From Your Phone” on page 189.)  
2. Highlight Recipients and press  
.
3. Highlight OnlineAddr. Book and press  
.
4. To select a recipient, highlight a recipient and press  
.
(You may select up to 10 recipients.)  
5. Press Done (left softkey) when you are finished selecting  
recipients.  
6. Follow the onscreen instructions to add available options.  
7. Confirm the recipients and attached data.  
8. Press the appropriate softkey to send your Sprint PCS Picture  
Mail.  
TosendvideosfromtheonlineAddressBook:  
1. From the online video display, select a video you wish to send  
and press Options (right softkey). (See “Managing Online  
Pictures From Your Phone” on page 189.)  
2. Highlight SendVideo and press  
.
3. To complete and send the Sprint PCS Video Mail, follow  
steps 2-8 above.  
Tip: When you send pictures and videos from the Sprint PCS Picture Mail  
Website, you can also attach pictures and videos from the Website. To attach  
another picture or video file, highlight the box next to Pictures or Videos and press  
the appropriate softkey.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tosendanalbumfromonlinemode:  
1. From the online Albums display, select an album you wish to  
send and press Send (left softkey). (See “Managing Online  
Pictures From Your Phone” on page 189.)  
2. Follow steps 2-8 in “To send pictures from the online Address  
Book” on page 192 to complete and send your Sprint PCS  
Picture Mail.  
Accessing Online Picture Options FromYour Phone  
Toaccessyouronlinepicturesoptionsfromyourphone:  
1. Select a picture from your online display (see “Managing Online  
Pictures From Your Phone” on page 189).  
2. Press Options (right softkey) to display options.  
3. To select an option, highlight it and press  
.
Ⅲ
Copy/Move to copy or move pictures to a selected album:  
MoveThis to move the currently highlighted picture to  
the album.  
MoveSelection to move the selected pictures to the album.  
MoveAll to move all pictures in the current album  
(or My Uploads) to the target album.  
CopyThis to copy the currently highlighted picture to the  
album.  
CopySelection to copy the selected pictures to the album.  
CopyAll to copy all pictures in the current album  
(or My Uploads) to the target album.  
Tip: Press New (right softkey) to copy/move pictures to a new folder.  
Ⅲ
Details/Edit to display the details of currently highlighted  
picture or edit the picture. Select from TextCaption,  
PictureInfo, or RotatePicture.  
Ⅲ
Delete to erase pictures saved in the current album (or My  
Uploads). Select ThisPicture, SelectedPictures, or AllPictures.  
Ⅲ
SavetoPhone to download to the Saved to Phone folder to  
assign the pictures to the phone task. Select from  
SetasPictureID, SetasScrnSaver, or DownloadOnly.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ⅲ
InfoBar to display picture’s information, such as folder  
name, picture number, caption, etc. Select On to display the  
information. (Expanded picture only.)  
Tip: From expanded picture display, press the navigation key up or down to hide  
or display the Info Bar.  
Ⅲ
Thumbnail/Expand to switch the display from thumbnail view  
(up to nine pictures per screen) to full-screen.  
Tip: You can also switch the thumbnail view to the expanded display by pressing  
and holding . To go back to thumbnail view, press  
.
Ⅲ
CreateAlbum to create a new album (from My Uploads only).  
Enter the album name and select Save (left softkey).  
Ⅲ
OnlineAlbums to switch the display to the online album list.  
Toaccessyouronlinevideosoptionsfromyourphone:  
1. Select a video from your online display (see “Managing Online  
Pictures From Your Phone” on page 189).  
2. Press Options (right softkey) to display options.  
3. To select an option, highlight it and press  
.
Ⅲ
SendVideo to send videos. (See “Sending Videos From the In  
Camcorder Folder” on the page 185 for details.)  
Ⅲ
Copy/Move to copy or move videos to a selected album.  
Select from MoveThis, MoveSelection, MoveAll, CopyThis,  
CopySelection, or CopyAll.  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
Details/Edit to display the details of currently highlighted  
video or edit the video. Select from TextCaption or VideoInfo.  
Delete to erase videos saved in the current album (or My  
Uploads). Select from ThisVideo, SelectedVideos, or  
AllVideos.  
Ⅲ
SavetoPhone to download to the Saved to Phone folder to  
assign videos to the phone task. Select from SetasRinger, or  
DownloadOnly.  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
Thumbnail/Expand to switch the display from thumbnail view  
(up to nine videos per screen) to full-screen.  
CreateAlbum to create a new album (from My Uploads only).  
Enter the album name and select Save (left softkey).  
OnlineAlbums to switch the display to the online album list.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Toaccessyouronlinealbumsoptionsfromyourphone:  
1. Display the album list in the online Sprint PCS Picture Mail  
menu (see “Managing Online Pictures From Your Phone” on  
page 189).  
2. Use your navigation key to select an album (or My Uploads).  
3. Press Options (right softkey) to display options.  
4. To select an option, highlight it and press  
.
Ⅲ
CreateAlbum to create a new album. Enter a new album  
name and press Save (left softkey).  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
DeleteAlbum to delete the selected album.  
Rename Album to rename the selected album. Enter a new  
name and press Save (left softkey).  
Note: My Uploads cannot be erased or renamed.  
Ⅲ
AlbumInfo to display album information:name, created  
time/date, and the number of stored pictures and videos.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 2L  
Using Your Phone’s Built-in Media Player  
In This Section  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
YourMultimediaChannelOptions  
AccessingYourMediaPlayer’sChannelListings  
PlayingaVideoorAudioClip  
MultimediaFAQs  
Yourwirelessphone’sbuilt-inmediaplayergivesyoutheabilitytolisten  
toaudioclipsandviewvideoclipsrightfromyourphone’sdisplay. It’s a  
great way to stay up-to-date with news, weather, and sports  
information while also providing entertainment with the latest  
blockbuster movie trailers or music videos – anywhere, anytime on  
the network provided to you. Just access your media player from  
your phone’s main menu, scroll to your choice of channel, and  
select one of the video or audio clips to play. It’s like having a TV in  
the palm of your hand.  
This section explains the features and options of your phone’s  
built-in media player.  
Section 2L: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Media Player  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Your Multimedia Channel Options  
Multimedia Service offers a variety of accessible audio or video  
channels, depending on your Service Plan and multimedia  
subscriptions. Your subscription options include a comprehensive  
basic service as well as a full menu of a variety of additional channel  
options.  
ⅷ
PreviewChannel: This free channel lets you sample clips from all of  
the available channels before you make a decision to subscribe.  
It's like viewing the movie preview before deciding whether you  
want to spend the money to go see the full motion picture.  
ⅷ
SprintTV: This comprehensive basic service gives you access to a  
variety of content from familiar brands. Think of it as "basic cable"  
for your phone. It allows you unlimited access to this content as  
long as you continue to pay the monthly subscription fee.  
ⅷ
AvailableIndividualChannelOptions: You also have the option of  
subscribing to individual channels from an extensive menu  
offering. These channels are available for a monthly subscription  
fee and allow you unlimited access as long as you continue to pay  
your monthly subscription fee.  
Section 2L: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Media Player  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AccessingYour Media Player’s Channel  
Listings  
It’s easy to access and view the multimedia Channel Listings on your  
Sanyo SCP-7400 from the phone’s main menu.  
ToaccessyourmediaplayerandChannelListings:  
1. Press  
from standby mode to display the phone’s main menu.  
2. Select MediaPlayer and press . (Your ChannelListing will  
display, divided into the following two sections:)  
Ⅲ
MyChannels: These include the complimentary Previews  
channel that Sprint provides, as well as any available  
individual channels for which you have purchased access.  
If you have purchased Sprint TV, either through a Sprint TV  
Vision Plan subscription or by purchasing it separately, it  
will be displayed here.  
Ⅲ
AvailableChannels: These are channels that have not yet  
been purchased but are available to access for a monthly  
subscription fee. Use your navigation key to scroll through  
and select a channel, and follow the onscreen instructions  
to purchase access to it. Upon purchasing access to one of  
these channels, the channel will be listed, along with its  
corresponding channel number, in the MyChannels section  
of your media player's Channel Listings. You will see it  
displayed in this section the next time you access your  
phone's media player.  
Section 2L: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Media Player  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing aVideo orAudio Clip  
ToaccessyourmediaplayerandChannelListings:  
1. Press  
from standby mode to display the phone’s main menu.  
2. Select MediaPlayer and press  
to display your Channel  
Listings.  
3. Use your keypad to enter a channel number (or use your  
navigation key to scroll to a channel and press ).  
Ⅲ
MyChannels: If you have selected a channel that you’ve  
already signed up for (or if it’s a channel with no monthly  
fee), you will see a list of available clips.  
Ⅲ
AvailableChannels: If you have selected a channel you have  
not yet signed up for, you will be prompted to accept the  
corresponding monthly charge. Follow the onscreen  
prompts to subscribe to the selected channel. (A list of  
available clips will display.)  
4. Scroll to the clip you would like to play and press Select (left  
softkey) or . (The clip will automatically load and begin  
playing.)  
Ⅲ
Press Options (right softkey) to display several options (see  
page 201 for details).  
Tip: To change the volume of video or audio, press the Side Volume key up or down.  
Tip: To play another clip, press the navigation key up or down, or press your  
desired channel number with your keypad while playing the clip.  
Section 2L: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Media Player  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Toplayaclipfromthebrowser:  
You can play a clip from a URL in the browser (if available).  
1. Press Web (right softkey) to launch the browser.  
2. Select the page that includes URLs.  
3. Select your desired URL and press  
.
Toplayaclipinatextmessage:  
You can play a clip in the text message that includes the URL (if  
available).  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Messaging and press  
.
3. Select TextMsgs and press  
.
4. Select Inbox or your defined folder, and press  
.
5. Select the message that includes URLs.  
6. Select your desired URL and press Go (left softkey) to play the  
video or audio clip.  
7. Follow the onscreen prompt to play the clip.  
Tip: To switch the speakerphone on or off, press  
while playing a clip.  
Section 2L: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Media Player  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multimedia Options  
While using the Multimedia Player, several options are available.  
To select an option, press Options (right softkey), highlight it and  
press  
.
ⅷ
ChannelListing to display the channel list.  
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
OnlineCatalog to display online catalogs (if available).  
Info to display channel information (if available).  
PlayerSettings to select frames to display while playing clips.  
Select from AudioSkins or SkinFrames (only appears while you are  
in the channel list).  
ⅷ
Help to see the Multimedia instruction page.  
Note: The first time you access one of your Available Channels, you will be  
prompted to accept the corresponding monthly fee (unless it’s a channel that  
doesn’t have an associated monthly fee). Accepting the charge gives you access  
to the channel for as long as you continue to pay the monthly fee. If you accept  
the fee, the next time you access your phone’s media player, this channel will  
appear in the My Channels section of your Channel Listings.  
Note: The icons next to channel numbers indicate types of channels. Press to  
play an audio clip, or press to play a video clip. appears if the channel has  
two or more clips.  
Tip: When entering the specific channel number, channels 01 - 09 do not require  
you to enter a “0.” For example, to access channel “07,” just press the “7” key.  
Section 2L: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Media Player  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multimedia FAQs  
1. Howdoesmyphone’sMultimediaServicedifferfromVideoMail?  
Multimedia Service lets you access high-quality video and audio  
clips provided by external sources. Video Mail lets you capture,  
upload and share videos that you personally create with your  
phone’s built-in camcorder.  
2. HowamIchargedforMultimediaService?  
SprintPCSVisionPlan:  
Ⅲ
With a Sprint PCS Vision Plan, you can play an unlimited  
number of video/audio clips on your phone’s display as  
long as you’ve subscribed to a channel (see next bullet).  
You also receive access to the Previews channel as a  
courtesy from Sprint. It doesn’t cost you anything to play  
the clips, but you will need to pay a monthly fee for any  
channel subscriptions (see the following bullet).  
Ⅲ
In addition to complimentary access to the Previews  
channel, you can subscribe to any of the channels listed in  
the Available Channels section of your Channel Listings  
for an additional monthly fee. Clips within these channels  
will continue to be available to you as long as you  
continue to pay your monthly channel subscription fee.  
3. WillIknowifI’mreceivinganincomingcallwhileI’mviewingor  
listeningtoanaudioclip?  
Yes. Incoming calls will roll into voicemail while you are playing  
a clip. If the caller leaves a voicemail, the voicemail icon will  
appear on the screen.  
4. Howlongaretheclips?WillIknowtheestimatedtimeitwilltaketo  
playtheclippriortoaccessingit?  
Once you have selected a channel, you will see a listing of the  
available clips, with the clip’s length appearing after the clip’s  
title (if available). In general, a clip’s duration will depend on  
the story or content being provided, and can be fairly short or as  
long as a few minutes.  
Section 2L: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Media Player  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. CanIaccessamultimediaclipwhereverIam, aslongasIhave  
myphone?  
As long as you are on the network provided to you, you will  
have access to the audio and video clips.  
Note: Multimedia Service does not work while roaming off of the network  
provided to you or where service is unavailable.  
6. ArethevideosthatI’mviewing“live”videos?  
No. This service provides videos on demand. The video and  
audio clips are refreshed throughout the day, but they are not  
“live.”  
7. AfterpurchasingaccesstoanAvailableChannelforamonthlyfee, do  
Ireceiveanyconfirmation?Thatis, howdoIknowithasbeen  
purchased?  
The next time you access your media player’s Channel Listings,  
the purchased channel title and corresponding number will  
appear in the MyChannels section.  
8. Whyaresomechannelsalreadypre-loadedintotheMyChannels  
section?  
Some channels, such as Previews, are offered free of charge as a  
customer courtesy. These channels automatically appear in the  
MyChannels section of your Channel Listings.  
9. IfIdon’tsubscribetoSprintPCSVisionPlan, amIstillabletoviewthe  
multimediaclips?  
No.  
10. HowcanIeasilyaccessachannelwithouthavingtoscrollthroughall  
thechannelsinmyChannelListings?  
Each channel will have a number to the left of it. You can simply  
press this number to quickly access the clips located within that  
channel.  
Tip: When entering the specific channel number, channels 01 - 09 do not require  
you to enter a “0.” For example, to access channel “07,” just press the “7” key.  
Section 2L: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Media Player  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. WhatdoesitmeanwhenthevideopausesandIseetheword  
“loading”atthebottomofthescreen?  
This happens when the media player is in the process of loading  
the data necessary to play the clip. It typically occurs when  
there is heavy traffic on the network.  
12. HowcanIcancelserviceifIdecideIdon’twantit?  
To cancel your Multimedia Service, contact your service  
provider.  
13. IfIplacemystereoheadphonesonandinsertthemintothephone’s  
headsetjack, canIclosetheflipwhileIamplayinganaudio(orvideo)  
clipwithoutinterruptingtheclip?  
Yes. When you insert your stereo headset into the phone’s  
headset jack, the phone automatically goes into “headset  
mode,” allowing you to close the flip and continue playing the  
clip (likewise, if your phone is in “headset mode,” a phone call  
will not become disconnected by closing the flip).  
14. CanIsurftoadifferentchannelwhileIamplayingaclip?  
Yes; while you are playing a clip, you can use the up and down  
navigation keys to surf to a different channel. A small pop-up  
screen will appear that tells you which channel you are  
watching as well as other channels you have access to.  
Use the navigation keys to scroll through the different channels.  
Once you find a channel that you want to watch, scroll to it and  
press  
(or simply wait approximately 3 seconds) and the  
channel will begin loading.  
Section 2L: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Media Player  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 3  
®
Qwest Service Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 3A  
®
Qwest Service Features: The Basics  
In This Section  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
UsingVoicemail  
UsingCallerID  
RespondingtoCallWaiting  
MakingaThree-WayCall  
UsingCallForwarding  
Nowthatyou’vemasteredyourphone’sfundamentals, it’stimetoexplore  
thecallingfeaturesthatenhanceyourwirelessservice. This section  
outlines your basic Qwest Service features.  
Section 3A: Qwest Service Features – The Basics  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Voicemail  
Setting Up YourVoicemail  
All unanswered calls to your wireless phone are automatically  
transferred to your voicemail, even if your phone is in use or turned  
off. Therefore, you will want to set up your voicemail and personal  
greeting as soon as your phone is activated.  
Tosetupyourvoicemail:  
1. Press and hold  
.
2. Follow the system prompts to:  
Ⅲ
Create your passcode  
Ⅲ
Record your greeting  
Ⅲ
Record your name announcement  
Ⅲ
Choose whether or not to activate One-Touch Message  
Access (a feature that lets you access messages and  
bypassing the need for you to enter your passcode)  
Note: The voicemail setup process may vary in certain Affiliate areas.  
Voicemail Notification  
There are several ways your phone alerts you of a new message:  
ⅷ
By displaying a message on the screen.  
ⅷ
By sounding the assigned ringer type.  
ⅷ
By the LED blinking red.  
ⅷ
By displaying the icon at the top of your screen.  
Tip: If you have two or more notifications, the event list will appear.  
Section 3A: Qwest Service Features – The Basics  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NewVoicemail MessageAlerts  
When you receive a new voice message, your phone alerts you and  
prompts you to call your voicemail.  
Tocallyourvoicemail:  
ᮣ
Press  
.
TodisplayyourMissedLog:  
ᮣ
Press Events (right softkey).  
Important: When you are roaming off the network provided to you, you may not  
receive notification of new voicemail messages. It is recommended that you  
periodically check your voicemail by dialing 1 + area code + your wireless phone  
number. When your voicemail answers, press  
and enter your passcode.  
You will be charged roaming rates when accessing voicemail while roaming off  
the network provided to you.  
Note: Your phone accepts messages even when it is turned off. However, you are  
only notified of new messages when your phone is turned on. You may not  
receive new messages when roaming outside of the network provided to you.  
RetrievingYourVoicemail Messages  
You can review your messages directly from your wireless phone or  
from any other touch-tone phone. To dial from your wireless phone,  
you can either speed dial your voicemail or use the menu keys.  
UsingOne-TouchMessageAccess  
ᮣ
Press and hold  
. (Your phone will dial your voicemail box.)  
UsingtheMenuKeysonYourPhonetoAccessYourMessages  
1. Press to access the main menu.  
2. Select Messaging and press  
.
3. Select Voicemail and press  
.
4. Select CallVoicemail or Call:SpeakerOn, and press  
.
Note: You are charged for airtime minutes when you are accessing your  
voicemail from your wireless phone.  
Section 3A: Qwest Service Features – The Basics  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UsingaPhoneOtherThanYourWirelessPhonetoAccess  
Messages  
1. Dial your wireless phone number.  
2. When your voicemail answers, press  
.
3. Enter your passcode.  
Tip: When you call into voicemail you first hear the header information (date,  
time, and sender information) for the message. To skip directly to the message,  
press  
during the header.  
VoicemailButtonGuide  
Here’s a quick guide to your keypad functions while listening to  
voicemail messages. For further details and menu options, see  
“Voicemail Menu Key” on page 213.  
Date/Time Send Reply Advance  
Replay  
Erase  
Rewind  
Call Back  
Help  
Forward  
Save  
Cancel  
Skip  
Section 3A: Qwest Service Features – The Basics  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Voicemail Options  
Your phone offers several options for organizing and accessing your  
voicemail.  
UsingExpertMode  
Using the Expert Mode setting for your personal voicemail box helps  
you navigate through the voicemail system more quickly by  
shortening the voice prompts you hear at each level.  
ToturnExpertModeonoroff:  
1. Press and hold  
to access your voicemail. (If your voicemail  
box contains any new or saved messages, press  
to access  
the main voicemail menu.)  
2. Press  
to change your Personal Options, following the  
system prompts.  
3. Press  
for Expert Mode.  
4. Press  
to turn Expert Mode on or off.  
SettingUpGroupDistributionLists  
Create up to 20 separate group lists, each with up to 20 customers.  
1. Press and hold  
to access your voicemail. (If your voicemail  
box contains any new or saved messages, press  
to access  
the main voicemail menu.)  
2. Press  
to change your Personal Options, following the  
system prompts.  
3. Press  
for Administrative Options.  
for Group Distribution Lists.  
4. Press  
5. Follow the voice prompts to create, edit, rename, or delete  
group lists.  
Callback  
Return a call after listening to a message without disconnecting  
from voicemail.  
ᮣ
Press  
after listening to a message. (Once the call is  
complete, you’re returned to the voicemail main menu.)  
Section 3A: Qwest Service Features – The Basics  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Voicemail-to-VoicemailMessage  
Record and send a voice message to other voicemail users.  
1. From the main voicemail menu, press  
to send a message.  
2. Follow the voice prompts to enter the phone number.  
3. Follow the voice prompts to record and send your voice  
message.  
Voicemail-to-VoicemailMessageReply  
Reply to a voice message received from any other voicemail user.  
1. After listening to a voice message, press  
.
2. Follow the voice prompts to record and send your reply.  
Voicemail-to-VoicemailMessageForwarding  
Forward a voice message, except those marked “Private,” to other  
voicemail users.  
1. After listening to a message, press  
.
2. Follow the voice prompts to enter the phone number.  
3. Follow the voice prompts to record your introduction and  
forward the voice message.  
Voicemail-to-VoicemailReceiptRequest  
Receive confirmation that your voice message has been listened to  
when you send, forward, or reply to other voicemail users.  
1. After you have recorded a message, press  
to indicate you  
are satisfied with the message you recorded.  
2. Press  
to mark receipt requested.  
3. Press  
to send your voicemail message.  
Section 3A: Qwest Service Features – The Basics  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ContinueRecording  
When leaving a voice message, you can choose to continue recording  
even after you’ve stopped.  
ᮣ
Before pressing  
to indicate that you are satisfied with the  
message you recorded, press  
to continue recording.  
ExtendedAbsenceGreeting  
When your phone is turned off or you are off the network provided  
to you for an extended period, this greeting can be played instead of  
your normal personal greeting.  
1. From the main voicemail menu, press  
for Personal  
Options.  
2. Press  
for Greetings.  
to record an Extended Absence Greeting.  
3. Press  
Clearing the Message Icon  
Your phone may temporarily continue to display the message icon  
after you have checked your voice and text messages.  
Tocleartheiconfromthedisplayscreen:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Messaging and press  
3. Select Voicemail and press  
4. Select ClearCount and press  
.
.
.
5. Select Yes and press  
.
DisplayingYourVoicemail Details  
This feature allows you to show the number of new voicemail  
messages and the time you received the voicemail notification.  
Todisplayyourvoicemaildetails:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Messaging and press  
.
3. Select Voicemail and press  
.
4. Select Details and press  
.
Section 3A: Qwest Service Features – The Basics  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Voicemail Menu Key  
Following the prompts on the voicemail system, you can use your  
keypad to navigate through the voicemail menu. The following list  
outlines your phone’s voicemail menu structure.  
Listen  
Envelope Information  
Reply  
Advance 8 Seconds  
Replay  
Rewind  
Forward Message  
Erase  
Callback  
Save  
Options  
Send a Message  
Personal Options  
Notification Options  
Phone Notification  
Numeric Paging to a Wireless Phone  
Return to Personal Options Menu  
Administrative Options  
Skip Pass code  
Autoplay  
Message Date & Time On/Off  
Change Pass code  
Group Distribution List  
Return to Personal Options Menu  
Greetings  
Personal Greetings  
Name Announcement  
Extended Absence Greeting  
Return to Personal Options Menu  
Expert Mode (On/Off)  
Place a Call  
Disconnect  
Section 3A: Qwest Service Features – The Basics  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Caller ID  
Caller ID allows people to identify a caller before answering the  
phone by displaying the number of the incoming call. If you do not  
want your number displayed when you place a call, just follow these  
easy steps.  
Toblockyourphonenumberfrombeingdisplayedforaspecific  
outgoingcall:  
1. Press  
2. Enter the number you want to call.  
3. Press  
.
.
TM  
To permanently block your number, call Qwest Wireless Repair at  
1-877-879-0611.  
Responding to CallWaiting  
When you’re on a call, Call Waiting alerts you of incoming calls by  
sounding one beep. Your phone’s screen informs you that another  
call is coming in and displays the caller’s phone number. (This feature  
may not be available while you are in analog area.)  
Torespondtoanincomingcallwhileyou’reonacall:  
ᮣ
Press  
(or press Options [right softkey], highlight Flash, and  
press ). (This puts the first caller on hold and answers the  
second call.)  
Tip: Press Ignore (left softkey) when you do not want to answer the call.  
Toswitchbacktothefirstcaller:  
ᮣ
Press  
again (or press Options [right softkey], highlight  
Flash, and press ).  
Tip: For those calls where you don’t want to be interrupted, you can temporarily  
disable Call Waiting by pressing  
before placing your call.  
Call Waiting is automatically reactivated once you end the call.  
Section 3A: Qwest Service Features – The Basics  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making a Three-Way Call  
With Three-Way Calling, you can talk to two people at the same time.  
When using this feature, the normal airtime rates will be charged for  
each of the two calls.  
TomakeaThree-WayCall:  
1. Enter a number you wish to call and press  
or  
.
2. Once you have established the connection, press  
(or press  
Options [right softkey], highlight Three-WayCall, and press ).  
(This puts the first caller on hold.)  
3. Dial the second number you wish to call and press  
(or  
press Options [right softkey], highlight Call or Call:SpeakerOn,  
and press ).  
4. When you’re connected to the second party, press  
again  
(or press Options [right softkey], highlight Flash, and press  
)
to begin your three-way call.  
If one of the people you called hangs up during your call, you and the  
remaining caller stay connected. If you initiated the call and are the  
first to hang up, all three callers are disconnected.  
Tip: You can also begin a Three-Way Call by displaying a phone number stored in  
your Contacts, Call History, or Messaging. To call the third party, press  
step 3 above.  
during  
Note: Call Waiting and Three-Way Calling may not be available while roaming off  
the network provided to you.  
Section 3A: Qwest Service Features – The Basics  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Call Forwarding  
Call Forwarding lets you forward all your incoming calls to another  
phone number – even when your phone is turned off. You can  
continue to make calls from your phone when Call Forwarding is  
activated.  
ToactivateCallForwarding:  
1. Press  
.
2. Enter the area code and phone number to which your future  
calls should be forwarded.  
3. Press  
. (You will hear a tone to confirm the activation of  
Call Forwarding.)  
TodeactivateCallForwarding:  
1. Press  
.
2. Press  
. (You will hear a tone to confirm the deactivation.)  
Note: You are charged a higher rate for calls you have forwarded.  
Note: Ready Link calls cannot be forwarded.  
Section 3A: Qwest Service Features – The Basics  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 3B  
SM  
Sprint PCS Vision  
In This Section  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
GettingStartedWithVision  
UsingMultimediaServices  
UnderstandingMessaging  
AccessingEmailProviders  
UsingInstantMessaging  
ࡗ
 DownloadingContent  
ࡗ
 AccessingGames  
ࡗ
 AccessingRingers  
ࡗ
 AccessingScreenSavers  
ࡗ
 ExploringtheWeb  
ExperiencingWirelessOnlineChat 
ࡗ
 SprintPCSVisionFAQs  
SM  
SprintPCS Vision bringsyouclarityyoucanseeandhearwithadvanced  
multimediaservices. These features, including messaging, games,  
downloadable ringers and screen savers, and Web access are easy  
to learn and use. The rich, colorful graphic experience is visually  
comparable to your home or office computer. Clearly, it’s a whole  
new way to look at wireless.  
This section introduces these advanced services and walks you  
through the necessary steps to start taking advantage of Sprint PCS  
Vision.  
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting StartedWith Sprint PCSVision  
®
With your Sanyo SCP-7400 and wireless service from Qwest , you are  
ready to start enjoying the advantages of Sprint PCS Vision. This  
section will help you learn the basics of using your Sprint PCS Vision  
services, including managing your User Name, launching a Vision  
connection, and navigating the Web with your phone.  
Your User Name  
When you buy a compatible phone and sign up for a service  
plan that includes Sprint PCS Vision, you’re automatically assigned  
a User Name. A User Name is typically your 10-digit wireless  
phone number followed by “@qwest.sprintpcs.com.” For example,  
if your phone number is 555-123-4567, your User Name will be  
[email protected].  
When you use Sprint PCS Vision services, your User Name is  
submitted to identify you to the network. The User Name is also  
useful as an address for Email, as a way to personalize Web services,  
and as an online virtual identity.  
Your User Name will be automatically programmed into your  
phone. You don’t have to enter it.  
FindingYourUserName  
If you aren’t sure what your Sprint PCS Vision User Name is, you can  
easily find it on your phone.  
TofindyourUserName:  
ᮣ
From standby mode, access your phone’s main menu, then go  
to Settings > PhoneInfo > Phone#/UserID.  
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Launching a Sprint PCSVision Connection  
TolaunchaSprintPCSVisionconnection:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Web and press . (Your Sprint PCS Vision connection  
will launch and the Sprint PCS Vision home page will display.)  
TheSprintPCSVisionHomePage  
Vision Home  
Snoop Dogg  
voice ringers!  
1. Messaging  
2. Downloads  
3. News  
4. Weather  
5. Sports  
6. Entertainment  
7. Money  
Go  
Shortcut: You can also press Web (right softkey) in standby mode.  
Note: If Net Guard is enabled and displayed (see next page), press OK (left  
softkey) to continue and launch the Web.  
Tip: When Ready Link Guard is set to on, a warning message will appear.  
Press Continue (left softkey) to continue. (See page 155 for Ready Link Guard.)  
While connecting, the following will appear on the screen:  
Connecting...Pleasewait..  
If you had a previous Sprint PCS Vision connection, the last page you  
visited (for example, Email or ESPN Top News) will display when you  
launch your browser. When this occurs, you may not see the  
“Connecting...” message when you launch the session. Though the  
browser is open, you are not currently in an active data session - that  
is, no data is being sent or received. As soon as you navigate to  
another page, the active session will launch and you will see the  
“Connecting...” message.  
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Net Guard  
When you first connect to the Web, the Net Guard will appear to  
confirm that you want to connect. This feature helps you avoid  
accidental connections. You can disable the Net Guard in the future  
by selecting AlwaysAuto-Connect when the Net Guard is displayed.  
TochangeyourNetGuardsettings:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select PCSVision and press  
4. Select NetGuard and press  
.
.
.
5. Select On or Off and press  
.
Ⅲ
On to activate the Net Guard.  
Ⅲ
Off to deactivate the Net Guard.  
Note: When enabled, the Net Guard appears only once per session. The Net  
Guard does not appear if the phone is merely re-connecting due to a time-out.  
Sprint PCSVision Connection Status and Indicators  
Your phone’s display lets you know the current status of your  
Sprint PCS Vision connection through indicators which appear at the  
top of the screen. The following symbols are used:  
Your Sprint PCS Vision connection is active (data is being  
transferred); the transmit/receive symbol will blink to indicate  
data transmission. Incoming voice calls go directly to voicemail;  
outgoing voice calls can be made, but the Sprint PCS Vision  
connection will terminate.  
Your Sprint PCS Vision connection is dormant (no data is being  
sent or received). Though not currently active, when dormant  
the phone can restart an active connection quickly; voice calls  
can be made and received.  
Your phone is not currently able to access Sprint PCS Vision  
service features.  
If no indicator appears, your phone does not have a current  
Sprint PCS Vision connection. To launch a connection, see  
“Launching a Sprint PCS Vision Connection” on page 219.  
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Navigating the Web  
Navigating through menus and Websites during a Sprint PCS Vision  
session is easy once you’ve learned a few basics. Here are some tips  
for getting around:  
Softkeys  
During a Sprint PCS Vision session, the bottom line of your phone’s  
display contains one or more softkeys. These keys are shortcut  
controls for navigating around the Web, and they correspond to the  
softkey buttons directly below the phone’s display screen.  
Tip: Depending on which Websites you visit, the labels on the softkeys may  
change to indicate their function.  
Tousesoftkeys:  
ᮣ
Press the desired softkey button. (If an additional pop-up menu  
appears when you press the softkey button, select the menu  
items using your keypad [if they’re numbered] or by  
highlighting the option and pressing .)  
1. Messaging  
2. Downloads  
3. News  
4. Weather  
5. Sports  
6. Entertainment  
7. Money  
8. Find if...  
9. Portals  
0. My Account  
Go  
left softkey  
Scrolling  
right softkey  
As with other parts of your phone’s menu, you’ll have to scroll up and  
down to see everything on some Websites.  
ToscrolllinebylinethroughWebsites:  
ᮣ
Press the navigation key up or down.  
ToscrollpagebypagethroughWebsites:  
ᮣ
Press the volume buttons on the side of the phone.  
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting  
Once you’ve learned how to use softkeys and scroll, you can start  
navigating the Web.  
Toselecton-screenitems:  
ᮣ
Use the navigation key to highlight the desired item, then press  
the desired softkey button (or press  
).  
Tip: You’ll find that the left softkey is used primarily for selecting items. This  
softkey is often labeled “Go.”  
Tip: If the items on a page are numbered, you can use your keypad (number keys)  
to select an item. (The tenth item in a numbered list may be selected by pressing  
the  
key on your phone’s keypad, even though the number 0 doesn’t appear  
on the screen.)  
Links allow you to jump to different Web pages, select special  
functions, or even place phone calls.  
Toselectlinks:  
ᮣ
Highlight the link and select the appropriate softkey.  
GoingBack  
Togobackonepage:  
ᮣ
Press the  
key on your phone.  
Note: The  
key is also used for deleting text (like a BACKSPACE key) when  
you are entering text.  
GoingHome  
ToreturntotheSprintPCSVisionhomepagefromanyotherWebpage:  
ᮣ
Press the right softkey, then highlight Home and press  
OK (left softkey).  
Tip: You can also return to the Sprint PCS Vision home page by pressing and  
holding the  
key.  
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multimedia  
UsingtheSprintPCSVisionMultimediaService  
Your phone’s built-in media player and Sprint PCS Vision Multimedia  
Service allow you to listen to audio clips and view video clips right  
from your phone’s display. See and hear the latest news, sports, and  
weather information in video and sound on-the-go, anytime,  
anywhere on the network provided to you.  
Note: For more information about your phone’s multimedia capabilities, see  
Section 2L : Using Your Phone’s Built-in Media Player on page 196.  
Purchasing Multimedia Channels  
Topurchaseamultimediachannel:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select MediaPlayer and press  
.
3. Select a channel under AvailableChannels and press Select (left  
softkey).  
4. Follow the onscreen instructions to purchase the channel.  
Tip: You can also purchase the channel by pressing the channel number during  
step 3 above.  
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing anAudio orVideo Clip  
Enjoy your purchased channels from the channel list. In addition to  
the list, you can also enjoy the Multimedia Player from a URL in the  
browser or in the text message you have received (if available).  
Toplayanaudioorvideoclip:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
(the channel list appears).  
2. Select MediaPlayer and press  
Note: When you select the Media Player menu, categories may appear before  
displaying the channel list (e.g. News, Sports, Entertainment, etc.) Select a  
category and press  
to display your channel list.  
3. Select a purchased channel under MyChannels and press  
or  
Select (left softkey).  
Tip: The indicator My Channels will not appear if you have purchased all available  
channels.  
4. Use your navigation key to browse through available clips and  
press Select (left softkey) to select and play an available clip.  
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messaging  
Understanding Messaging  
Now you can send and receive emails, picture mails, and text messages  
and participate in Web-based chatrooms right from your phone.  
Messaging allows you to stay connected to friends, family, and co-  
workers 24 hours a day anywhere on the network provided to you.  
Note: In some instances, when you receive a text message, the accents with  
characters will be erased.  
MessageTypes  
There are many types of text messaging available on your phone.  
These appear on your screen as NewMessage and include text  
messages and picture mail messages.  
New Messages  
When you receive a new message, the message notification and icon  
(
for a text message and for a picture mail) will appear.  
Press View (left softkey) to display the message details.  
ⅷ
Press Call (left softkey) to dial the callback number. (Appears  
when a callback number is highlighted.)  
ⅷ
Press Reply (left softkey) to reply to the sender. (Appears when a  
phone number or email address is highlighted.)  
ⅷ
Press Go (left softkey) to go to the Website. (Appears when a URL  
is highlighted.)  
ⅷ
Press Forward (left softkey) to forward the message. (Appears  
only if there are no phone numbers or URLs in the message.)  
ⅷ
Press Options (right softkey) to display options. (See page 231 for  
details.)  
Tip: If you have two or more notifications, the event list will appear.  
Tip: To make a Ready Link call from the message, press and hold  
applicable).  
(if  
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Message Storage  
Your phone can store up to 200 received and 180 sent messages.  
When the message memory is full, the oldest unlocked message will  
be deleted automatically. (See page 230 for locking messages.)  
Displaying Messages  
To display a message from the message notification alert, see “New  
Messages” on page 225.  
Todisplayatextmessagefromthemainmenu:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Messaging and press  
.
3. Select TextMsgs and press . (The folder list appears.)  
4. Select Inbox, Sent, Outbox, Drafts, or your defined folder and  
press . (The message list appears.)  
5. Select the header of the message you want to see and press  
.
(The message detail appears.)  
Todisplayapicturemailfromthemainmenu:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Messaging and press  
.
3. Select PictureMail and press . (The Sprint PCS Picture Mail  
Inbox appears.)  
4. Select Inbox and press . (The Sprint PCS Picture Mail list  
appears.)  
5. Select your desired message and press . (The Sprint PCS  
Picture Mail detail appears.)  
6. Select the URL in the message and press Go (left softkey).  
(The browser will launch and display the picture.)  
Tip: Press the navigation key right to read the next message from the message  
detail display; press the navigation key left to read the previous message.  
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending aText Message  
With Messaging, you can use a person’s wireless phone number to  
send and receive text messages from your wireless phone to their  
messaging-ready phone – and they can send messages to you. When  
you receive a new message, you’ll automatically be notified with a  
two-way text message. To send a Sprint PCS Picture Mail, see  
“Sending Sprint PCS Picture Mail From Messaging” on page 185.  
Tosendatextmessage:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Messaging and press  
.
3. Select SendMessage and press  
.
4. Select Text and press  
.
5. Select an option from the followings and press  
.
Ⅲ
PhoneBookEntry to select a recipient from your Contacts list.  
Highlight an entry and press to select. Or select  
<AddEntry> to enter a new entry. Press Done (left softkey)  
when you are finished selecting/entering recipients.  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
MobilePhone# to enter a mobile phone number directly.  
EmailAddress to enter an email address directly.  
FromRecentList to select recipients from a list of recent  
message recipients.  
6. To add a recipient, press Options (right softkey), highlight  
AddRecipient, and press  
.
Ⅲ
Edit to edit the selected entry.  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
Erase to erase the selected entry.  
EraseAll to erase all entries you have selected and entered.  
AddRecipient to add recipients.  
7. Press Next (left softkey) when you are finished selecting and  
entering recipients (you may include up to 10 recipients).  
8. To enter a message, select Message and press  
.
9. Use your keypad to enter a text message (or press Mode [right  
softkey] to select from PresetMessages, RecentMessages or  
Signature), and press OK (left softkey).  
Tip: The Signature option appears only when you set your signature (see page 65).  
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. To set the message priority, scroll to Priority and press  
11. Select Ordinary or Urgent and press  
.
.
12. To change the recipients or to save the message as a draft, press  
Options (right softkey) and select an option from the following.  
Ⅲ
ChgRecipients to change recipients.  
Ⅲ
SendCallback# to select from None, MyPhone#, or Other to  
notify your recipients of your callback number. (See “Setting  
a Callback Number” on page 65.)  
Ⅲ
SavetoDrafts to save the message to a Drafts folder. (See  
below to edit and send the draft message.)  
Tip: The oldest message in the drafts folder will be erased automatically when  
you save more than 10 messages.  
13. Press Send (left softkey) to send the message.  
Note: If there is a failure when sending a message in no-service area, you are  
prompted to select to send the message automatically. Press Yes (left softkey),  
and the message goes to the Outbox folder with the icon. If you press No (right  
softkey), the message goes to the folder with the icon. (See page 229 to send  
the message.)  
Sending a Message in the Drafts Folder  
Toeditandsendamessageinthedraftsfolder:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Messaging and press  
.
3. Select TextMsgs and press  
.
4. Select Drafts and press  
.
5. Select the message you wish to edit and press Edit (left softkey).  
6. After editing the message, press Send (left softkey) to send the  
message.  
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending a Message in the Outbox Folder  
If a failure occurs when you try to send a message, the message goes  
to the Outbox folder.  
TosendamessagefromtheOutboxfolder:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Messaging and press  
.
3. Select TextMsgs and press  
.
4. Select Outbox and press  
.
5. Select the message you wish to send and press Send (left softkey).  
Message Options  
Several options are available when you display a folder list, message  
list, or message details.  
FolderListOptions  
From the folder list display, press Options (right softkey). (See  
“Displaying Messages” on page 226 for displaying the list.) To select  
an option, highlight it and press  
.
ⅷ
EditFolder to edit the folder (self-defined folder only).  
EraseFolder to erase the folder (self-defined folder only).  
CreateFolder to create a new self-defined folder.  
ComposeNew to compose a new message.  
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
EraseMessages to erase messages (if applicable).  
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MessageListOptions  
From the message list display or the Sprint PCS Picture Mail list  
display, press Options (right softkey). (See “Displaying Messages” on  
page 226 for displaying the list.) To select an option, highlight it and  
press  
.
ⅷ
Reply to reply to the message. (Inbox and your defined folder only.)  
ⅷ
Forward to forward the message. (Inbox, your defined folder, and  
Sent only.)  
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
Edit to edit a message. (Outbox and Drafts only.)  
Send to send a message. (Outbox and Drafts only.)  
Move to move a message to another folder. (Inbox and your  
defined folder only.)  
ⅷ
Lock to lock a message. Locked messages will not be erased  
automatically. To unlock the message, select Unlock and press  
(Sprint PCS Picture Mail Inbox, Inbox, your defined folder and  
Sent only.)  
.
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
ComposeNew to compose a new message.  
Erase to erase the selected message.  
EraseReadMsgs to erase read messages in the folder (except  
locked messages). (Sprint PCS Picture Mail Inbox, Inbox, and  
your defined folder only.)  
ⅷ
EraseAll to erase all messages in the folder (except locked  
messages).  
Tip: Locked messages will be displayed with the icon.  
Tip: To make a call from the list, highlight a message and press  
applicable).  
or  
(if  
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MessageDetailsOptions  
From message details, press Options (right softkey) to display message  
options. (See page 226 for displaying.) Following options are  
available for messages in the Sprint PCS Picture Mail Inbox, Inbox,  
Send, and your defined folder. To select an option, highlight it and  
press  
.
ⅷ
Call(GotoList) to display phone numbers in the message to make a  
call. Select a number and press Call (left softkey) to make a call.  
ⅷ
Call:SpeakerOn to display phone numbers in the message to make  
a call in speakerphone mode. Select a number and press Call (left  
softkey) to make a call.  
Tip: To make a Ready Link call, select a number and press  
.
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
Prepend to add numbers to the beginning of the phone number.  
GotoURLList to display URLs in the message to go to the site.  
SendMessage to display phone numbers and email addresses to  
send a message. (Except Sprint PCS Picture Mail.)  
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
Reply to reply to the message. (Inbox and defined folder only.)  
Forward to forward the message. (Except Sprint PCS Picture Mail.)  
Move to move a message to another folder. (Inbox and defined  
folder only.)  
ⅷ
Lock to lock the message. Locked messages will not be erased  
automatically. To unlock the message, select Unlock and press  
.
ⅷ
ⅷ
FontSize to change the font size from Small or Normal.  
SavetoPh. Book to save the phone number, email address, and  
URLs. Select a data category and press  
to save.  
ⅷ
ⅷ
GotoPhoneBook to go to the Contacts list.  
ComposeNew to compose a new message. (Except Sprint PCS  
Picture Mail.)  
ⅷ
Erase to erase the message.  
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Display Font Size of a Message  
From a message details display (except in the Outbox and Drafts  
folder), press Options (right softkey) to display message options.  
Toadjustthedisplayfontsize:  
1. Highlight FontSize and press  
.
2. Highlight Small or Normal and press  
.
Prepending a Phone Number From a Message  
From a message details display (except in the Outbox and Drafts  
folder), press Options (right softkey) to display message options.  
Toaddaprefixtoaphonenumber:  
1. Highlight Prepend and press  
.
2. Select your desired phone number and press  
or OK (left  
softkey).  
3. Enter the digits or pauses (see below) you want to add to the  
number.  
4. Press  
or  
to make a call.  
– or –  
To select another option, press Options (right softkey), highlight  
it and press  
.
Ⅲ
Call to dial the phone number.  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
Call:SpeakerOn to dial the phone number in speakerphone  
mode.  
SavePhone# to store the phone number in your Contacts  
Directory.  
H HardPause to insert a hard pause. (See “Dialing and  
Saving Phone Numbers With Pauses” on page 29.)  
T 2-Sec. Pause to insert a 2-second pause. (See “Dialing and  
Saving Phone Numbers With Pauses” on page 29.)  
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Message Folders  
Incoming Updates and numeric pages are stored in folders in your  
phone’s Messaging menu. You may add up to ten folders or use the  
phone’s default folder. When ten self-defined folders exist, the  
“Create Folder ”option will not appear.  
Toaddanewfolder:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Messaging and press  
3. Select TextMsgs and press  
4. Press Options (right softkey).  
.
.
5. Highlight CreateFolder and press  
.
6. Enter a folder name and press  
or OK (left softkey).  
7. Choose from the following optional features for the added  
folder and press to save each item. Scroll to each item and  
press  
.
Ⅲ
AutoFiling to file the incoming messages automatically into  
the self-defined folder by keywords. Following options  
appear when this feature is set to on.  
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
Keyword to enter a keyword for Auto Filing.  
Notify to set the notification display and ringer on or off.  
EnvelopeIcon to set the notification icon on or off.  
8. Press Save (left softkey) to save the folder.  
Toeditafolder:  
1. From the folder list display, highlight a defined folder.  
2. Press Options (right softkey).  
3. Highlight EditFolder and press  
.
4. Select the box you wish to edit and press  
.
5. Enter or select a new folder name or setting.  
6. Press  
or OK (left softkey).  
7. Press Save (left softkey).  
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Moving a Message IntoAnother Folder  
You can move incoming messages to the Inbox or a self-defined folder.  
Tomoveamessageintoanotherfolder:  
1. From the message display in your Inbox or defined folder, press  
Options (right softkey) to display the message options.  
2. Highlight Move and press  
.
3. Highlight your desired folder and press . (You must have at  
least one defined folder to move a message.)  
Erasing Messages  
Toeraseanindividualmessage:  
1. From the folder list display, select Inbox, Sent, Outbox, Drafts, or  
your defined folder and press  
.
2. Select the message you want to erase and press Options (right  
softkey).  
3. Highlight Erase and press . (A confirmation will display.)  
4. Select Yes and press  
.
Tip: To erase all messages, select Erase All during step 3 above.  
Toeraseselectedmessages:  
1. From the folder list display, press Options (right softkey).  
2. Highlight EraseMessages and press  
.
3. Select Read, Unread, and/or Sent, and press  
to check the  
appropriate box(es).  
4. After selecting the box(es), press Done (left softkey).  
5. Select Erase and press  
to erase selected messages (except  
locked messages).  
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Erasing a Folder  
Toeraseatextmessagefolder:  
1. From the folder list display, highlight the defined folder you  
want to erase.  
2. Press Options (right softkey).  
3. Highlight EraseFolder and press  
4. Select Yes and press  
.
.
Note: When you erase a folder, the messages within the folder are also erased.  
If the folder contains a new (unread) message or locked message, you are  
prompted to select Erase or Don’t Erase.  
Accessing Email Providers  
With Sprint PCS Vision, you can use popular email services such as  
®
®
®
AOL Mail, Yahoo! Mail, MSN Hotmail, and EarthLink to keep in  
touch even while you’re on the go.  
Using Email Providers  
Toaccessemailprovidersfromyourwirelessphone:  
1. From the Sprint PCS Vision home page, select Messaging.  
2. Select Email.  
3. Select an email provider, such as AOLMail, Yahoo!Mail, or  
EarthLink.  
4. Use your keypad to enter the required sign in information for  
the selected provider, such as user name, email address, and/or  
password, and select SignIn. (Your mailbox for the selected  
provider will display.)  
Note: The information required for sign in will vary depending on the email  
provider you are accessing.  
5. Follow the onscreen instructions to read, reply to, compose,  
send, and manage your email account.  
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Instant Messaging  
Sprint PCS Vision also provides you with access to popular instant  
®
messaging (IM) clients, including Yahoo! Messenger and  
®
TM  
AOL Instant Messenger .  
Accessing Instant Messaging  
Toaccessinstantmessagingclientsfromyourwirelessphone:  
1. Press the navigation key up and select InstantMsg.  
– or –  
From the Sprint PCS Vision home page, select Messaging and  
select InstantMessaging.  
2. Select an email provider, such as AOLInstantMessenger or  
Yahoo!Messenger.  
3. Use your keypad to enter the required sign in information for  
the selected provider, such as user name and/or password, and  
select SignIn. (Your IM screen for the selected provider will  
display.)  
Note: The information required for sign in will vary depending on the instant  
messaging provider you are accessing.  
4. Follow the onscreen instructions to read, reply to, compose,  
send, and manage your IM account.  
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ExperiencingWireless Online Chat  
Sprint PCS Vision gives you the ability to join wireless chatrooms  
from your wireless phone, to send text messages and icons to  
chatroom participants, or to launch a one-on-one (private) chatroom.  
Toaccessachatroomfromthebrowser:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Highlight Web and press  
3. Select Messaging.  
4. Select Chat.  
.
5. Select Enter. (You will see a disclaimer for Wireless Chat.)  
6. SelectIAgreeto enter the Chat menu.  
7. Use your keypad to enter a nickname and select Enter.  
8. Select a chatroom from the menu, for example, “Friends” or  
“Singles.” (Once in the chatroom, you may scroll through the  
postings to read messages from other chatroom participants.)  
Topostamessage:  
1. During an active chatroom session, select Addtext.  
2. Enter your message.  
3. Select Send.  
Tosetupaprivatechatroom:  
1. During an active chatroom session, select 1->1.  
2. Select a chatter with whom you’d like to launch a private  
chatroom.  
Toexitachatroom:  
ᮣ
Select Leave.  
Note: To avoid inadvertent data usage charges, you should sign out of  
chatrooms when you are ready to exit.  
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Downloading Premium Services Content  
With Sprint PCS Vision and your new wireless phone, you have  
access to a dynamic variety of Premium Service content, such as  
downloadable Games, Ringers, Screen Savers, and other applications.  
The basic steps required to access and download Premium Service  
content are outlined below.  
AccessingtheDownloadMenus  
ToaccesstheSprintPCSVisiondownloadmenus:  
1. Press  
2. Select Downloads and press  
3. Select the type of file you wish to download (Games, Ringers,  
ScreenSavers, or Applications) and press  
to access the main menu.  
.
.
4. Select GetNew and press . (The browser will launch and take  
you to the corresponding download menu.)  
ToaccesstheSprintPCSVisiondownloadmenusfromtheWeb  
browser:  
ᮣ
From the Sprint PCS Vision home page, select Games, Ringers, or  
ScreenSavers to go to the corresponding download menu. (For  
more information on navigating the Web, see “Navigating the  
Web” on page 221.)  
SelectinganItemtoDownload  
You can search for available items to download in a number of ways:  
ⅷ
Featured displays a rotating selection of featured items.  
ⅷ
BrowseCategory allows you to narrow your search to a general  
category, such as Movie/TV Themes for Ringers or College Logos  
for Screen Savers. (There may be several pages of available  
content in a list. Select Next9 to view additional items.)  
ⅷ
Search allows you to use your keypad to enter search criteria to  
locate an item. You may enter an entire word or title or perform a  
partial-word search (for example, entering “goo” returns “Good  
Ol’ Boy,” “The Good, the Bad, and the Ugly,” and “Goofy - Club”).  
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DownloadinganItem  
Once you’ve selected an item you wish to download, highlight it and  
press  
or OK (left softkey). You will see a summary page for the  
item including its title, the vendor, the download detail, the file size,  
and the cost. Links allow you to view the LicenseDetails page, which  
outlines the price, license type, and length of license for the  
download, and the TermsofUse page, which details the Premium  
Services Terms of Use and your responsibility for payment.  
Todownloadaselecteditem:  
1. From the information page, select Buy. (The item will download  
automatically. When the NewDownload screen appears, the  
item has been successfully downloaded to your phone.)  
Note: If you have not previously purchased an item, you will be prompted to  
create your purchasing profile.  
2. Select an option to continue:  
Ⅲ
Select Next (left softkey) to assign the downloaded item (or  
to launch, in the case of a game or application).  
Your Sprint PCS Vision session will end and you will be  
redirected to the appropriate phone menu screen.  
Ⅲ
Press  
to quit the browser and return to standby mode.  
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Games  
Accessing Games  
You can play a variety of entertaining and graphically-rich games on  
your phone. New games are easy to download and play.  
Tip: For complete instructions on downloading, see “Downloading Premium  
Services Content” on page 238.  
DownloadingGames  
Todownloadanavailablegametoyourphone:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Downloads and press  
.
3. Highlight Games and press  
.
4. Highlight GetNew and press . (The browser will launch and  
take you to the Games download menu.)  
5. Use your navigation key to highlight and select a game you wish  
to download. (For more information on navigating the Web, see  
“Navigating the Web” on page 221.)  
6. Select Buy from the item information page. (The game will  
download automatically. When the NewDownload screen  
appears, the game has been successfully downloaded to  
your phone.)  
Note: If you have not previously purchased an item, you will be prompted to  
create your purchasing profile.  
7. Select an option to continue:  
Ⅲ
Select Next (left softkey) to launch the downloaded game.  
Your Sprint PCS Vision session will end and you will be  
redirected to the appropriate phone menu screen.  
Ⅲ
Press  
to quit the browser and return to standby mode.  
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PlayingGames  
Toplayadownloadedgameonyourphone:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Downloads and press  
.
3. Highlight Games and press  
.
4. Select the game you wish to play and press  
.
5. Press the left softkey if a prompt displays the days remaining on  
the game license.  
6. Follow the onscreen instructions to play the game.  
Toquitagame:  
1. When you are finished playing, press  
. (A prompt will  
display: “Resume the Application?”)  
2. Select Yes to continue playing.  
– or –  
Select No to exit.  
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ringers  
Accessing Ringers  
You can personalize your SCP-7400 by downloading and assigning  
different ringers to numbers in your Contacts list.  
Tip: For complete instructions on downloading, see “Downloading Premium  
Services Content” on page 238.  
DownloadingRingers  
Todownloadanavailableringertoyourphone:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Downloads and press  
.
.
3. Highlight Ringers and press  
4. Highlight GetNew and press . (The browser will launch and  
take you to the Ringers download menu.)  
5. Use your navigation key to highlight and select a ringer you  
wish to download. (For more information on navigating the  
Web, see “Navigating the Web” on page 221.)  
6. From the item information page, select Buy. (The ringer will  
download automatically. When the NewDownload screen  
appears, the ringer has been successfully downloaded to  
your phone.)  
Note: If you have not previously purchased an item, you will be prompted to  
create your purchasing profile.  
7. Select an option to continue:  
Ⅲ
Select Next (left softkey) to assign the downloaded ringer.  
Your Sprint PCS Vision session will end and you will be  
redirected to the appropriate phone menu screen.  
Ⅲ
Press  
to quit the browser and return to standby mode.  
Note: You may store total of 2816 KB of downloaded data on your phone.  
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AssigningDownloadedRingers  
You can assign downloaded ringers directly from the Downloads  
menu or through your phone’s Settings menu.  
ToassignadownloadedringerfromtheDownloadsmenu:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Downloads and press  
.
3. Highlight Ringers and press  
.
4. Highlight a downloaded ringer and press Options (right softkey).  
5. Highlight Setas and press  
6. Highlight VoiceCalls, Voicemail, Messaging, Calendar/Alarm,  
.
Start-upTone, Power-offTone or PhoneBook and press  
.
The following two items need an extra step:  
Ⅲ
VoiceCalls requires you to highlight WithCallerID or  
NocallerID and press  
.
Ⅲ
PhoneBook requires you to highlight the Contacts entry you  
want to assign and press  
.
(A message appears confirming that the ringer has been assigned.)  
ToassignadownloadedringerfromtheSettingsmenu:  
ᮣ
Please see one of the following:  
Ⅲ
“Selecting Ringer Types for Voice Calls” on page 38.  
Ⅲ
“Selecting Ringer Types for Voicemail, Messages, or  
Calendar/Alarm” on page 39.  
Ⅲ
“Setting a Start-up/Power-off Tone” on page 40.  
Ⅲ
“Selecting a Ringer and Image Type for an Entry” on  
page 98.  
Note: You may assign a ringer to more than one type of call.  
PurchasingRingers  
You can purchase ringers directly from your phone by following the  
instructions on page 238 or through www.qwestwireless.com.  
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Screen Savers  
Accessing Screen Savers  
Download unique images to use as screen savers – or make it easy to  
tell who’s calling by assigning specific images to numbers in your  
Contacts list.  
Tip: For complete instructions on downloading, see “Downloading Premium  
Services Content” on page 238.  
DownloadingScreenSavers  
TodownloadanavailableScreenSavertoyourphone:  
1. Press  
2. Select Downloads and press  
3. Highlight ScreenSavers and press  
to access the main menu.  
.
.
4. Highlight GetNew and press . (The browser will launch and  
take you to the Screen Savers download menu.)  
5. Use your navigation key to highlight and select a Screen Saver  
you wish to download. (For more information on navigating the  
Web, see “Navigating the Web” on page 221.)  
6. From the item information page, select Buy. (The screen saver  
will download automatically. When the NewDownload screen  
appears, the screen saver has been successfully downloaded to  
your phone.)  
Note: If you have not previously purchased an item, you will be prompted to  
create your purchasing profile.  
7. Select an option to continue:  
Ⅲ
Select Next (left softkey) to assign the downloaded screen  
saver. Your Sprint PCS Vision session will end and you will  
be redirected to the appropriate phone menu screen.  
Ⅲ
Press  
to quit the browser and return to standby mode.  
Note: You may store total of 2816 KB of downloaded data on your phone.  
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AssigningDownloadedScreenSavers  
Downloaded Screen Savers may be assigned directly from the  
Downloads menu or through the Settings menu.  
ToassignadownloadedScreenSaverfromtheDownloadsmenu:  
1. Press  
2. Select Downloads and press  
3. Highlight ScreenSavers and press  
to access the main menu.  
.
.
4. Highlight a downloaded Screen Saver and press Options (right  
softkey).  
5. Select Set as and press  
.
6. Highlight one of IncomingCalls, ScreenSaver, or PhoneBook and  
press . The following item needs an extra step:  
Ⅲ
PhoneBook requires you to highlight your desired Contacts  
entry and press  
.
(A message appears confirming that the image has been assigned.)  
Note: Depending on the data, you can select where to assign downloaded images:  
Image data can be assigned to Incoming Calls, Screen Saver, or Phone Book.  
Animation data can be assigned to Standby, Outgoing Calls, or Service Search.  
Note: You may assign a Screen Saver to more than one task.  
PurchasingScreenSavers  
You can purchase Screen Savers directly from your phone by following  
the instructions on page 238, or through www.qwestwireless.com.  
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web  
Exploring the Web  
With Web access on your wireless phone, you can browse full-color  
graphic versions of your favorite Websites, making it easier than ever  
to stay informed while on the go. Follow sports scores and breaking  
news and weather and shop on your phone anywhere on the  
network provided to you.  
In addition to the features already covered in this section, the  
Sprint PCS Vision home page offers access to these colorful,  
graphically rich Web categories. Many sites are available under more  
than one menu – choose the one that’s most convenient for you.  
ⅷ
News. Get up-to-the-minute news regarding finance, business,  
sports, and entertainment at sites like CNNtoGo, Bloomberg,  
USA Today, and ABCNews.  
ⅷ
Weather. Access The Weather Channel to get current weather  
conditions and forecasts.  
ⅷ
Entertainment. Get the latest buzz on your favorite stars as well as  
movie and music reviews at Websites like E! Online, Pocket  
TM  
BoxOffice , and TastNtalk.  
ⅷ
Sports. Enjoy current news, statistics, and sports scores, as well as  
updates of events in progress at ESPN.com and other sports sites.  
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Browser Menu  
Navigating the Web from your phone using the Sprint PCS Vision  
home page is easy once you get the hang of it. For details on how to  
navigate the Web, select menu items, and more, see “Navigating the  
Web” on page 221.  
Although the Sprint PCS Vision home page offers a broad and  
convenient array of sites and services for you to browse, not all sites  
are represented, and certain functions, such as going directly to  
specific Websites, are not available. For these and other functions,  
you will need to use the browser menu. The browser menu offers  
additional functionality to expand your use of the Web on your  
wireless phone.  
OpeningtheBrowserMenu  
The browser menu may be opened anytime you have an active  
Sprint PCS Vision session, from any page you are viewing.  
Toopenthebrowsermenu:  
ᮣ
Press (right softkey) from any page during an active  
Sprint PCS Vision session. (The browser menu will display.)  
(To launch a Sprint PCS Vision session, please see “Launching a  
Sprint PCS Vision Connection” on page 219.)  
Options available under the browser menu include:  
ⅷ
Home. Returns the browser to the Sprint PCS Vision home page.  
ⅷ
Forward. Allows you to go forward to the pages you have visited.  
ⅷ
Markthispage. Allows you to create new bookmarks.  
ⅷ
ViewBookmarks. Allows you to view and access bookmarked sites.  
ⅷ
Search. Launches a Google search.  
ⅷ
ShowURL. Displays the URL (Website address) of the site you’re  
currently viewing.  
ⅷ
GotoURL.... Allows you to navigate directly to a Website by  
entering its URL (Website address).  
ⅷ
History. Displays the pages you have visited.  
ⅷ
Refreshthispage. Reloads the current Web page.  
ⅷ
More.... Displays the additional menu options. (Restart Browser,  
Send Page, and Preferences.)  
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CreatingaBookmark  
Bookmarks allow you to store the address of your favorite Websites  
for easy access at a later time.  
Tocreateabookmark:  
1. Launch the Web page you want to mark.  
2. Press (right softkey) to go to the browser menu.  
3. Select Markthispage and press  
or OK (left softkey).  
Note: Bookmarking a page does not store the page contents, just its address.  
Some pages cannot be bookmarked. Whether a particular Web page may be  
marked is controlled by its creator.  
AccessingaBookmark  
Toaccessabookmark:  
1. Access the browser menu by pressing (right softkey).  
2. Select ViewBookmarks and press OK (left softkey).  
3. Highlight the bookmark you’d like to access and press  
or  
OK (left softkey) to go to the Website.  
EditingaBookmark  
Toeditabookmark:  
1. Launch the Web and press (right softkey) to access the  
browser menu.  
2. Select ViewBookmarks and press OK (left softkey).  
3. Select the bookmark you wish to edit and press (right  
softkey).  
4. Select EditAddress or EditTitle and press OK (left softkey).  
5. Press Edit (right softkey), use your keypad to edit the address or  
title, and press OK (left softkey).  
6. To save the bookmark, press OK (left softkey).  
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
248  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DeletingaBookmark  
Todeleteabookmark:  
1. Launch the Web and press (right softkey) to access the  
browser menu.  
2. Select ViewBookmarks and press OK (left softkey).  
3. Highlight the bookmark you wish to erase and press (right  
softkey).  
4. Select Delete and press OK (left softkey).  
5. Press Yes (right softkey).  
Tip: To delete all bookmarks, select Delete All during step 4 above.  
MovingaBookmark  
Tomoveabookmark:  
1. Access the ViewBookmarks menu as outlined above in steps 1-2,  
and press (right softkey).  
2. Select Reorder and press OK (left softkey).  
3. Highlight the bookmark you wish to move and press Move (left  
softkey).  
4. Move the bookmark to a new location by pressing the  
navigation key up or down and press Drop (left softkey).  
5. When you’re finished, press Finish (right softkey).  
GoingtoaSpecificWebsite  
TogotoaparticularWebsitebyenteringaURL(Websiteaddress):  
1. Launch the Web and press (right softkey) to display the  
browser menu.  
2. Select GotoURL... and press OK (left softkey).  
3. Select Address and press OK (left softkey).  
4. Use your keypad to enter the URL of the Website you wish to  
go to and press OK (left softkey).  
Note: Not all Websites are viewable on your phone.  
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ReloadingaWebPage  
Toreload(refresh)aWebpage:  
1. Launch the Web and press (right softkey) to display the  
browser menu.  
2. Select Refreshthispage and press OK (left softkey).  
RestartingtheWebBrowser  
If the Web browser appears to be malfunctioning or stops  
responding, you can usually fix the problem by simply restarting  
the browser.  
TorestarttheWebbrowser:  
1. From an active Sprint PCS Vision connection, press (right  
softkey) to display the browser menu.  
2. Select More... and press OK (left softkey).  
3. Select RestartBrowser and press OK (left softkey).  
SendingaWebPage  
This feature allows you to send a URL (Website address) you’re  
viewing through SMS text messaging.  
TosendaWebpage:  
1. From an active Sprint PCS Vision connection, press (right  
softkey) to display the browser menu.  
2. Select More... and press OK (left softkey).  
3. Select SendPage and press OK (left softkey).  
4. To complete and send a Web Page, follow steps 5-13 in  
“Sending a Text Message” on page 227.  
AdjustingtheBrowserSoundVolume  
Toadjustthebrowsersoundvolume:  
1. From an active Sprint PCS Vision connection, press (right  
softkey) to display the browser menu.  
2. Select More... and press OK (left softkey).  
3. Select Preferences and press OK (left softkey).  
4. Select SoundVolume and press OK (left softkey).  
5. Select your desired volume level by pressing the navigation key  
up or down and press  
.
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sprint PCSVision FAQs  
HowwillIknowwhenmyphoneisreadyforSprintPCSVision  
service?  
When your phone is ready, your User Address will be displayed in the  
Phone#/UserID menu. Go to Settings > PhoneInfo > Phone#/UserID.  
HowdoIsign-inforthefirsttime?  
You are automatically signed in to access Sprint PCS Vision services  
when you turn on your phone.  
HowdoIknowwhenmyphoneisconnectedtoSprintPCSVision  
services?  
Your phone automatically connects when Sprint PCS Vision service  
is used or an incoming message arrives. Your phone will also display  
the  
icon. (Connecting takes about 10-12 seconds.)  
CanImakecallsanduseSprintPCS Visionservicesatthesametime?  
You cannot use voice and Sprint PCS Vision services simultaneously.  
If you receive a call while Sprint PCS Vision service is active, the call  
will be forwarded to voicemail. You can place an outgoing call  
anytime, but it will interrupt any in-progress Sprint PCS Vision session.  
Whenismydataconnectionactive?  
Your connection is active when data is being transferred. Outgoing  
calls are allowed; incoming calls go directly to voicemail. When  
active, the (Sending) or (Receiving) indicator flashes on your  
phone’s display screen.  
Whenismydataconnectiondormant?  
If no data is received for 10 seconds, the connection goes dormant.  
When the connection is dormant, voice calls are allowed. (The  
connection may become active again quickly.) If no data is received  
for an extended period of time, the connection will terminate.  
CanIsignoutofdataservices?  
You can sign out without turning off your phone; however, you will  
not be able to browse the Web or use other Sprint PCS Vision services.  
While signed out, you can still place or receive phone calls, check  
voicemail, and use other voice services. You may sign in again at any  
time. To sign out, go to Settings > PCSVision > DisableVision in your  
phone’s menu.  
Section 3B: Sprint PCS Vision  
251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 4  
Safety Guidelines  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 4A  
Safety  
In This Section  
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
ࡗ
Getting the Most Out of Your Reception  
MaintainingSafeUseofandAccesstoYourPhone  
CaringfortheBattery  
Acknowledging Special Precautions and the FCC Notice  
Consumer Information on Wireless Phones  
Owner’sRecord  
User’s Guide Proprietary Notice  
Partofgettingthemostoutofyournewwirelessphoneislearninghow  
thephoneworksandhowtocareforit. This section outlines  
performance and safety guidelines that help you understand the  
basic features of your phone’s operation.  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting the Most Out ofYour Reception  
KeepingTabsonSignalStrength  
The quality of each call you make or receive depends on the signal strength in your  
area. Your phone informs you of the current signal strength by displaying a number  
of bars next to the signal strength icon. The more bars displayed, the stronger the  
signal. If you’re inside a building, being near a window may give you better  
reception.  
Understanding the Power Save Feature  
If your phone is unable to find a signal after 15 minutes of searching, a Power Save  
feature is automatically activated. If your phone is active, it periodically rechecks  
service availability; you can also check it yourself by pressing any key. Anytime the  
Power Save feature is activated, a message is displayed on the screen. When a signal  
is found, your phone returns to standby mode.  
UnderstandingHowYourPhoneOperates  
Your phone is basically a radio transmitter and receiver. When it’s turned on, it  
receives and transmits radiofrequency (RF) signals. When you use your phone, the  
system handling your call controls the power level. This power can range from  
0.01µ watts to 0.2 watts in digital mode.  
KnowingRadioFrequencySafety  
The design of your wireless phone complies with updated NCRP standards  
described below.  
In 1991-92, the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) and the  
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) joined in updating ANSI’s 1982  
standard for safety levels with respect to human exposure to RF signals. More than  
120 scientists, engineers and physicians from universities, government health  
agencies and industries developed this updated standard after reviewing the  
available body of research. In 1993, the Federal Communications Commission  
(FCC) adopted this updated standard in a regulation. In August 1996, the FCC  
adopted hybrid standard consisting of the existing ANSI/IEEE standard and the  
guidelines published by the National Council of Radiation Protection and  
Measurements (NCRP).  
MaintainingYourPhone’sPeakPerformance  
There are several simple guidelines to operating your phone properly and  
maintaining safe, satisfactory service.  
ⅷ
Hold the phone with the antenna raised, fully-extended, and over your shoulder.  
ⅷ
Try not to hold, bend, or twist the phone’s antenna.  
ⅷ
Don’t use the phone if the antenna is damaged.  
ⅷ
Speak directly into the mouthpiece.  
ⅷ
Avoid exposing your phone and accessories to rain or liquid spills. If your phone  
does get wet, immediately turn the power off and remove the battery.  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
254  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note:For the best care of your phone, only authorized personnel should service your phone and  
accessories. Faulty service may void the warranty.  
Maintaining Safe Use of andAccess to  
Your Phone  
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY LEAD TO SERIOUS  
PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE PROPERTY DAMAGE  
UsingYourPhoneWhileDriving  
Talking on your phone while driving (or operating the phone without a hands-free  
device) is prohibited in some jurisdictions. Laws vary as to specific restrictions.  
Remember that safety always comes first.  
When using your phone in the car:  
ⅷ
Get to know your phone and its features, such as speed dial  
and redial.  
ⅷ
When available, use a hands-free device.  
ⅷ
Position your phone within easy reach.  
ⅷ
Let the person you are speaking to know you are driving; if necessary, suspend  
the call in heavy traffic or hazardous  
weather conditions.  
ⅷ
Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving.  
ⅷ
Dial sensibly and assess the traffic; if possible, place calls when stationary or  
before pulling into traffic.  
ⅷ
Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations that may divert your  
attention from the road.  
ⅷ
Dial  
to report serious emergencies. It’s free from your  
wireless phone.  
ⅷ
ⅷ
Use your phone to help others in emergencies.  
Call roadside assistance or a special non-emergency wireless number when  
necessary.  
®
Tip:To purchase an optional hands-free car kit, call Qwest Wireless Repair at 1-877-879-0611.  
FollowingSafetyGuidelines  
To operate your phone safely and efficiently, always follow any special regulations  
in a given area. Turn your phone off in areas where use is forbidden or when it may  
cause interference or danger.  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UsingYourPhoneNearOtherElectronicDevices  
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from radiofrequency (RF) signals.  
However, RF signals from wireless phones may affect inadequately shielded  
electronic equipment.  
RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic  
operating systems and/or entertainment systems in motor vehicles. Check with the  
manufacturer or their representative to determine if these systems are adequately  
shielded from external RF signals. Also check with the manufacturer regarding any  
equipment that has been added to your vehicle.  
Consult the manufacturer of any personal medical devices, such as pacemakers and  
hearing aids, to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF signals.  
Note:Always turn off the phone in health care facilities and request permission before using the  
phone near medical equipment.  
TurningOffYourPhoneBeforeFlying  
Turn off your phone before boarding any aircraft. To prevent possible interference  
with aircraft systems, the U.S. Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) regulations  
require you to have permission from a crew member to use your phone while the  
plane is on the ground. To prevent any risk of interference, FCC regulations  
prohibit using your phone while the plane is in the air.  
TurningOffYourPhoneinDangerousAreas  
To avoid interfering with blasting operations, turn your phone off when in a  
blasting area or in other areas with signs indicating two-way radios should be  
turned off. Construction crews often use remote-control RF devices to set off  
explosives.  
Turn your phone off when you’re in any area that has a potentially explosive  
atmosphere. Although it’s rare, your phone and accessories could generate sparks.  
Sparks can cause an explosion or fire, resulting in bodily injury or even death.  
These areas are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include:  
ⅷ
Fueling areas such as gas stations.  
ⅷ
Below deck on boats.  
ⅷ
Fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities.  
ⅷ
Areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or metal  
powders.  
ⅷ
Any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle’s  
engine.  
Note:Never transport or store flammable gas, liquid or explosives in the compartment of your  
vehicle that contains your phone or accessories.  
RestrictingChildren’sAccesstoYourPhone  
Your phone is not a toy. Do not allow children to play with it as they could hurt  
themselves and others, damage the phone or make calls that increase your invoice.  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
256  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Caring for the Battery  
ProtectingYourBattery  
The guidelines listed below help you get the most out of your battery’s  
performance.  
ⅷ
Use only Qwest-approved batteries and chargers. These chargers are designed  
to maximize battery life. Using other batteries or chargers voids your warranty  
and may cause damage.  
ⅷ
In order to avoid damage, charge the battery only in temperatures that range  
from 32º F to 113º F (0º C to 45º C).  
ⅷ
Don’t use the battery charger in direct sunlight or in high humidity areas, such  
as the bathroom.  
ⅷ
Never dispose of the battery by incineration.  
ⅷ
Keep the metal contacts on top of the battery clean.  
ⅷ
Don’t attempt to disassemble or short-circuit the battery.  
ⅷ
The battery may need recharging if it has not been used for a long period of  
time.  
ⅷ
It’s best to replace the battery when it no longer provides acceptable  
performance. It can be recharged hundreds of times before it needs replacing.  
ⅷ
Don’t store the battery in high temperature areas for long periods of time. It’s  
best to follow these storage rules:  
Less than one month:  
-4º F to 140º F (-20º C to 60º C)  
More than one month:  
-4º F to 113º F (-20º C to 45º C)  
DisposalofLithiumIon(LiIon)Batteries  
For safe disposal options of your LiIon batteries, contact your nearest authorized  
service center.  
SpecialNote:Be sure to dispose of your battery properly. In some areas, the  
disposal of batteries in household or business trash may be prohibited.  
Note:For safety, do not handle a damaged or leaking LiIon battery.  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Acknowledging Special Precautions and the  
FCC Notice  
FCC Notice  
This phone may cause TV or radio interference if used in close proximity to  
receiving equipment. The FCC can require you to stop using the phone if such  
interference cannot be eliminated.  
Vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (propane or butane) must comply with the  
National Fire Protection Standard (NFPA-58). For a copy of this standard, contact  
the National Fire Protections Association, One Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA  
02269, Attn.: Publication Sales Division.  
Cautions  
Any changes or modifications to your phone not expressly approved in this  
document could void your warranty for this equipment and void your authority to  
operate this equipment. Only use approved batteries, antennas and chargers. The  
use of any unauthorized accessories may be dangerous and void the phone  
warranty if said accessories cause damage or a defect to the phone.  
Although your phone is quite sturdy, it is a complex piece of equipment and can be  
broken. Avoid dropping, hitting, bending or sitting on it.  
Body-WornOperation  
To maintain compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines, if you wear a handset on  
your body, use the Qwest supplied or approved carrying case, holster or other  
body-worn accessory. If you do not use a body-worn accessory, ensure the antenna  
is at least 2.2 cm from your body when transmitting. Use of non-Qwest approved  
accessories may violate FCC RF exposure guidelines.  
For more information about RF exposure, visit the FCC Website at www.fcc.gov.  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
258  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SpecificAbsorptionRates(SAR)forWirelessPhones  
The SAR is a value that corresponds to the relative amount of RF energy absorbed in  
the head of a user of a wireless handset.  
The SAR value of a phone is the result of an extensive testing, measuring and  
calculation process. It does not represent how much RF the phone emits. All  
phone models are tested at their highest value in strict laboratory settings. But  
when in operation, the SAR of a phone can be substantially less than the level  
reported to the FCC. This is because of a variety of factors including its proximity to  
a base station antenna, phone design and other factors. What is important to  
remember is that each phone meets strict federal guidelines. Variations in SARs do  
not represent a variation in safety.  
All phones must meet the federal standard, which incorporates a substantial  
margin of safety. As stated above, variations in SAR values between different model  
phones do not mean variations in safety. SAR values at or below the federal standard  
of 1.6 W/kg are considered safe for use by the public.  
The highest reported SAR values of the SCP-7400 are:  
AMPS/CDMAmodes(Part22):  
Head: 1.390 W/kg; Body-worn: 0.940 W/kg  
PCSmode(Part24):  
Head: 0.951 W/kg; Body-worn: 1.150 W/kg  
FCCRadiofrequencyEmission  
This phone meets the FCC Radiofrequency Emission Guidelines.  
FCC ID number: AEZSCP-74H. More information on the phone’s SAR can be found  
from the following FCC Website: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid.  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Consumer Information onWireless Phones  
(The following information comes from a consumer information Website jointly  
sponsored by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) and the Federal  
Communications Commission (FCC), entitled “Cell Phone Facts: Consumer  
Information on Wireless Phones.” The information reproduced herein is dated  
July 29, 2003. For further updates, please visit the Website:  
http://www.fda.gov/cellphones/qa.html.)  
Whatisradiofrequencyenergy(RF)?  
Radiofrequency (RF) energy is another name for radio waves. It is one form of  
electromagnetic energy that makes up the electromagnetic spectrum. Some of  
the other forms of energy in the electromagnetic spectrum are gamma rays, x-  
rays and light. Electromagnetic energy (or electromagnetic radiation) consists of  
waves of electric and magnetic energy moving together (radiating) through  
space. The area where these waves are found is called an electromagnetic field.  
Radio waves are created due to the movement of electrical charges in antennas.  
As they are created, these waves radiate away from the antenna. All  
electromagnetic waves travel at the speed of light. The major differences  
between the different types of waves are the distances covered by one cycle of  
the wave and the number of waves that pass a certain point during a set time  
period. The wavelength is the distance covered by one cycle of a wave. The  
frequency is the number of waves passing a given point in one second. For any  
electromagnetic wave, the wavelength multiplied by the frequency equals the  
speed of light. The frequency of an RF signal is usually expressed in units called  
hertz (Hz). One Hz equals one wave per second. One kilohertz (kHz) equals one  
thousand waves per second, one megahertz (MHz) equals one million waves per  
second, and one gigahertz (GHz) equals one billion waves per second.  
RF energy includes waves with frequencies ranging from about 3000 waves per  
second (3 kHz) to 300 billion waves per second (300 GHz). Microwaves are a  
subset of radio waves that have frequencies ranging from around 300 million  
waves per second (300 MHz) to three billion waves per second (3 GHz).  
Howisradiofrequencyenergyused?  
Probably the most important use of RF energy is for telecommunications. Radio  
and TV broadcasting, wireless phones, pagers, cordless phones, police and fire  
department radios, point-to-point links and satellite communications all rely on  
RF energy.  
Other uses of RF energy include microwave ovens, radar, industrial heaters and  
sealers, and medical treatments. RF energy, especially at microwave  
frequencies, can heat water. Since most food has a high water content,  
microwaves can cook food quickly. Radar relies on RF energy to track cars and  
airplanes as well as for military applications. Industrial heaters and sealers use  
RF energy to mold plastic materials, glue wood products, seal leather items such  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
260  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
as shoes and pocketbooks, and process food. Medical uses of RF energy include  
pacemaker monitoring and programming.  
Howisradiofrequencyradiationmeasured?  
RF waves and RF fields have both electrical and magnetic components. It is  
often convenient to express the strength of the RF field in terms of each  
component. For example, the unit “volts per meter” (V/m) is used to measure  
the electric field strength, and the unit “amperes per meter” (A/m) is used to  
express the magnetic field strength. Another common way to characterize an RF  
field is by means of the power density. Power density is defined as power per  
unit area. For example, power density can be expressed in terms of milliwatts  
(one thousandth of a watt) per square centimeter (mW/cm2 or microwatts (one  
millionth of a watt) per square centimeter (µW/cm2).  
The quantity used to measure how much RF energy is actually absorbed by the  
body is called the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR is a measure of the  
rate of absorption of RF energy. It is usually expressed in units of watts per  
kilogram (W/kg) or milliwatts per gram (mW/g).  
WhatbiologicaleffectscanbecausedbyRFenergy?  
The biological effects of radiofrequency energy should not be confused with the  
effects from other types of electromagnetic energy.  
Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found in X-rays and gamma  
rays can ionize biological tissues. Ionization is a process where electrons are  
stripped away from their normal locations in atoms and molecules. It can  
permanently damage biological tissues including DNA, the genetic material.  
Ionization only occurs with very high levels of electromagnetic energy such as  
X-rays and gamma rays. Often the term radiation is used when discussing  
ionizing radiation (such as that associated with nuclear power plants).  
The energy levels associated with radiofrequency energy, including both radio  
waves and microwaves, are not great enough to cause the ionization of atoms  
and molecules. Therefore, RF energy is a type of non-ionizing radiation. Other  
types of non-ionizing radiation include visible light, infrared radiation (heat) and  
other forms of electromagnetic radiation with relatively low frequencies.  
Large amounts of RF energy can heat tissue. This can damage tissues and  
increase body temperatures. Two areas of the body, the eyes and the testes, are  
particularly vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little blood flow  
in them to carry away excess heat.  
The amount of RF radiation routinely encountered by the general public is too  
low to produce significant heating or increased body temperature. Still, some  
people have questions about the possible health effects of low levels of RF  
energy. It is generally agreed that further research is needed to determine what  
effects actually occur and whether they are dangerous to people. In the  
meantime, standards-setting organizations and government agencies are  
continuing to monitor the latest scientific findings to determine whether  
changes in safety limits are needed to protect human health.  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FDA, EPA and other US government agencies responsible for public health and  
safety have worked together and in connection with WHO to monitor  
developments and identify research needs related to RF biological effects.  
WhatlevelsofRFenergyareconsideredsafe?  
Various organizations and countries have developed standards for exposure to  
radiofrequency energy. These standards recommend safe levels of exposure for  
both the general public and for workers. In the United States, the FCC has used  
safety guidelines for RF environmental exposure since 1985.  
The FCC guidelines for human exposure to RF electromagnetic fields are  
derived from the recommendations of two expert organizations, the National  
Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements (NCRP) and the Institute of  
Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). In both cases, the recommendations  
were developed by scientific and engineering experts drawn from industry,  
government, and academia after extensive reviews of the scientific literature  
related to the biological effects of RF energy.  
Many countries in Europe and elsewhere use exposure guidelines developed by  
the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP).  
The ICNIRP safety limits are generally similar to those of the NCRP and IEEE,  
with a few exceptions. For example, ICNIRP recommends different exposure  
levels in the lower and upper frequency ranges and for localized exposure from  
certain products such as hand-held wireless telephones. Currently, the World  
Health Organization is working to provide a framework for international  
harmonization of RF safety standards.  
The NCRP, IEEE, and ICNIRP all have identified a whole-body Specific  
Absorption Rate (SAR) value of 4 watts per kilogram (4 W/kg) as a threshold  
level of exposure at which harmful biological effects may occur. Exposure  
guidelines in terms of field strength, power density and localized SAR were then  
derived from this threshold value. In addition, the NCRP, IEEE, and ICNIRP  
guidelines vary depending on the frequency of the RF exposure. This is due to  
the finding that whole-body human absorption of RF energy varies with the  
frequency of the RF signal. The most restrictive limits on whole-body exposure  
are in the frequency range of 30-300 MHz where the human body absorbs RF  
energy most efficiently. For products that only expose part of the body, such as  
wireless phones, exposure limits in terms of SAR only are specified.  
The exposure limits used by the FCC are expressed in terms of SAR, electric and  
magnetic field strength, and power density for transmitters operating at  
frequencies from 300 kHz to 100 GHz. The specific values can be found in two  
FCC bulletins, OET Bulletins 56 and 65:  
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/info/documents/bulletins/#56;  
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/info/documents/bulletins/#65.  
WhyhastheFCCadoptedguidelinesforRFexposure?  
The FCC authorizes and licenses products, transmitters, and facilities that  
generate RF and microwave radiation. It has jurisdiction over all transmitting  
services in the U.S. except those specifically operated by the Federal  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
262  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Government. While the FCC does not have the expertise to determine radiation  
exposure guidelines on its own, it does have the expertise and authority to  
recognize and adopt technically sound standards promulgated by other expert  
agencies and organizations, and has done so. (Our joint efforts with the FDA in  
developing this website is illustrative of the kind of inter-agency efforts and  
consultation we engage in regarding this health and safety issue.)  
Under the National Environmental Policy Act of 1969 (NEPA), the FCC has  
certain responsibilities to consider whether its actions will significantly affect  
the quality of the human environment. Therefore, FCC approval and licensing of  
transmitters and facilities must be evaluated for significant impact on the  
environment. Human exposure to RF radiation emitted by FCC-regulated  
transmitters is one of several factors that must be considered in such  
environmental evaluations. In 1996, the FCC revised its guidelines for RF  
exposure as a result of a multi-year proceeding and as required by the  
Telecommunications Act of 1996.  
Radio and television broadcast stations, satellite-earth stations, experimental  
radio stations and certain wireless communication facilities are required to  
undergo routine evaluation for RF compliance when they submit an application  
to the FCC for construction or modification of a transmitting facility or renewal  
of a license. Failure to comply with the FCC’s RF exposure guidelines could lead  
to the preparation of a formal Environmental Assessment, possible  
Environmental Impact Statement and eventual rejection of an application.  
Technical guidelines for evaluating compliance with the FCC RF safety  
requirements can be found in the FCC’s OET Bulletin 65.  
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/info/documents/bulletins/#65  
Low-powered, intermittent, or inaccessible RF transmitters and facilities are  
normally excluded from the requirement for routine evaluation for RF exposure.  
These exclusions are based on standard calculations and measurement data  
indicating that a transmitting station or equipment operating under the  
conditions prescribed is unlikely to cause exposures in excess of the guidelines  
under normal conditions of use. Such exclusions are not exclusions from  
compliance, but, rather, exclusions from routine evaluation. The FCC’s policies  
on RF exposure and categorical exclusion can be found in Section 1.1307(b) of  
the FCC’s Rules and Regulations [(47 CFR 1.1307(b)].  
HowcanIobtaintheSpecificAbsorptionRate(SAR)valueformy  
wirelessphone?  
The FCC requires that wireless phones sold in the United States demonstrate  
compliance with human exposure limits adopted by the FCC in 1996. The  
relative amount of RF energy absorbed in the head of a wireless telephone-user  
is given by the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR), as explained above. The FCC  
requires wireless phones to comply with a safety limit of 1.6 watts per kilogram  
(1.6 W/kg) in terms of SAR.  
Information on SAR for a specific phone model can be obtained for many  
recently manufactured phones using the FCC identification (ID) number for that  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
model. The FCC ID number is usually printed somewhere on the case of the  
phone. Sometimes it may be necessary to remove the battery pack to find the  
number. Once you have the ID number, go to the following Web address:  
www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid. On this page, you will see instructions for entering the  
FCC ID number. Type the FCC ID number exactly as requested (the Grantee  
Code is the first three characters, the Equipment Product Code is the rest of the  
FCC ID number). Then click on “Start Search.” The “Grant of Equipment  
Authorization” for your telephone should appear. Read through the grant for the  
section on “SAR Compliance,” “Certification of Compliance with FCC Rules for  
RF Exposure” or similar language. This section should contain the value(s) for  
typical or maximum SAR for your phone.  
Phones and other products authorized since June 2, 2000, should have the  
maximum SAR levels noted directly on the “Grant of Equipment Authorization.”  
For phones and products authorized between about mid-1998 and June 2000,  
detailed information on SAR levels is typically found in the exhibits associated  
with the grant. Once a grant is accessed, the exhibits can be viewed by clicking  
on “View Exhibit.” Grants authorized prior to 1998 are not part of the electronic  
database but, rather, have been documented in the form of paper records.  
The FCC database does not list phones by model number. However, consumers  
may find SAR information from other sources as well. Some wireless phone  
manufacturers make SAR information available on their own Web sites. In  
addition, some non-government Web sites provide SARs for specific models of  
wireless phones. However, the FCC has not reviewed these sites and makes no  
guarantees of their accuracy. Finally, phones certified by the Cellular  
Telecommunications and Internet Association (CTIA) are required to provide  
SAR information to consumers in the instructional materials that come with  
the phones.  
Dohands-freekitsforwirelessphonesreducerisksfromexposuretoRF  
emissions?  
Since there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from wireless  
phones, there is no reason to believe that hands-free kits reduce risks. Hands-  
free kits can be used with wireless phones for convenience and comfort. These  
systems reduce the absorption of RF energy in the head because the phone,  
which is the source of the RF emissions, will not be placed against the head. On  
the other hand, if the phone is mounted against the waist or other part of the  
body during use, then that part of the body will absorb more RF energy. Wireless  
phones marketed in the U.S. are required to meet safety requirements regardless  
of whether they are used against the head or against the body. Either  
configuration should result in compliance with the safety limit.  
DowirelessphoneaccessoriesthatclaimtoshieldtheheadfromRF  
radiationwork?  
Since there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from wireless  
phones, there is no reason to believe that accessories that claim to shield the  
head from those emissions reduce risks. Some products that claim to shield the  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
264  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
user from RF absorption use special phone cases, while others involve nothing  
more than a metallic accessory attached to the phone. Studies have shown that  
these products generally do not work as advertised. Unlike “hand-free” kits,  
these so-called “shields” may interfere with proper operation of the phone. The  
phone may be forced to boost its power to compensate, leading to an increase in  
RF absorption. In February 2002, the Federal trade Commission (FTC) charged  
two companies that sold devices that claimed to protect wireless phone users  
from radiation with making false and unsubstantiated claims. According to FTC,  
these defendants lacked a reasonable basis to substantiate their claim.  
Whatarewirelesstelephonebasestations?  
Fixed antennas used for wireless telecommunications are referred to as cellular  
base stations, cell stations, PCS (“Personal Communications Service”) stations or  
telephone transmission towers. These base stations consist of antennas and  
electronic equipment. Because the antennas need to be high in the air, they are  
often located on towers, poles, water tanks, or rooftops. Typical heights for  
freestanding base station towers are 50-200 feet.  
Some base stations use antennas that look like poles, 10 to 15 feet in length, that  
are referred to as “omni-directional” antennas. These types of antennas are  
usually found in rural areas. In urban and suburban areas, wireless providers  
now more commonly use panel or sector antennas for their base stations. These  
antennas consist of rectangular panels, about 1 by 4 feet in dimension. The  
antennas are usually arranged in three groups of three antennas each. One  
antenna in each group is used to transmit signals to wireless phones, and the  
other two antennas in each group are used to receive signals from wireless  
phones.  
At any base station site, the amount of RF energy produced depends on the  
number of radio channels (transmitters) per antenna and the power of each  
transmitter. Typically, 21 channels per antenna sector are available. For a typical  
cell site using sector antennas, each of the three transmitting antennas could be  
connected to up to 21 transmitters for a total of 63 transmitters. However, it is  
unlikely that all of the transmitters would be transmitting at the same time.  
When omni-directional antennas are used, a cellular base station could  
theoretically use up to 96 transmitters, but this would be very unusual, and,  
once again, it is unlikely that all transmitters would be in operation  
simultaneously. Base stations used for PCS communications generally require  
fewer transmitters than those used for cellular radio transmissions, since PCS  
carriers usually have a higher density of base station antenna sites.  
Arewirelesstelephonebasestationssafe?  
The electromagnetic RF signals transmitted from base station antennas stations  
travel toward the horizon in relatively narrow paths. For example, the radiation  
pattern for an antenna array mounted on a tower can be likened to a thin  
pancake centered around the antenna system. The individual pattern for a single  
array of sector antennas is wedge-shaped, like a piece of pie. As with all forms of  
electromagnetic energy, the power decreases rapidly as one moves away from  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
the antenna. Therefore, RF exposure on the ground is much less than exposure  
very close to the antenna and in the path of the transmitted radio signal. In fact,  
ground-level exposure from such antennas is typically thousands of times less  
than the exposure levels recommended as safe by expert organizations. So  
exposure to nearby residents would be well within safety margins.  
Cellular and PCS base stations in the United States are required to comply with  
limits for exposure recommended by expert organizations and endorsed by  
government agencies responsible for health and safety. Measurements made  
near cellular and PCS base station antennas mounted on towers have confirmed  
that ground-level exposures are typically thousands of times less than the  
exposure limits adopted by the FCC. In fact, in order to be exposed to levels at or  
near the FCC limits for cellular or PCS frequencies an individual would  
essentially have to remain in the main transmitted radio signal (at the height of  
the antenna) and within a few feet from the antenna. This is, of course, very  
unlikely to occur.  
When cellular and PCS antennas are mounted on rooftops, RF levels on that roof  
or on others near by would probably be greater than those typically  
encountered on the ground. However, exposure levels approaching or  
exceeding safety guidelines should be encountered only very close to or directly  
in front of the antennas. In addition, for sector-type antennas, typically used for  
such rooftop base stations, RF levels to the side and in back of these antennas are  
insignificant. General guidelines on antenna installations and circumstances  
that might give rise to a concern about an facility’s conformance with FCC  
regulations can be found in A Local Government Official’s Guide to Transmitting  
Antenna RF Emission Safety: Rules, Procedures, and Practical Guidance. This  
Guide can be accessed at: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety.  
Whoregulatesexposuretoradiationfrommicrowaveovens, televisionsets  
andcomputermonitors?  
The Food and Drug Administration is responsible for protecting the public from  
harmful radiation emissions from these consumer products.  
DoestheFCCroutinelymonitorradiofrequencyradiationfromantennas?  
The FCC does not have the resources or the personnel to routinely monitor the  
emissions for all the thousands of transmitters that are subject to FCC  
jurisdiction. However, the FCC does have measurement instrumentation for  
evaluating RF levels in areas that may be accessible to the public or to workers. If  
there is evidence for potential non-compliance with FCC exposure guidelines  
for a FCC-regulated facility, staff from the FCC’s Office of Engineering and  
Technology or the FCC Enforcement Bureau can conduct and investigation, and,  
if appropriate, perform actual measurements. Circumstances that could give  
rise to a concern about an facility’s conformance with FCC regulations can be  
found in in A Local Government Official’s Guide to Transmitting Antenna RF  
Emission Safety: Rules, Procedures, and Practical Guidance. This Guide can be  
accessed at: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety. Potential exposure problems should  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
266  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
be brought to the FCC’s attention by contacting the FCC RF Safety Program at:  
202-418-2464 or by email: [email protected].  
DoestheFCCmaintainadatabasethatincludesinformationonthelocation  
andtechnicalparametersofallthetransmittingtowersitregulates?  
Each of the FCC Bureaus maintains its own licensing database system for the  
service(s) it regulates (e.g., television, cellular service, satellite earth stations.)  
The FCC issues two types of licenses: site specific and market based. In the case  
of site specific licensed facilities, technical operating information is collected  
from the licensee as part of the licensing process. However, in the case of  
market based licensing (e.g., PCS, cellular), the licensee is granted the authority  
to operate a radio communications system in a geographic area using as many  
facilities as are required, and the licensee is not required to provide the FCC with  
specific location and operating parameters of these facilities.  
Information on site specific licensed facilities can be found the “General Menu  
Reports” (GenMen) at http://gullfoss2.fcc.gov/cgi-bin/ws.exe/genmen/index.hts.  
The various FCC Bureaus also publish on at least a weekly basis, bulk extracts of  
their licensing databases. Each licensing database has its own unique file  
structure. These extracts consist of multiple, very large files. The FCC’s Office of  
Engineering and Technology (OET) maintains an index to these databases at  
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/info/database/fadb.html. Entry points into the various  
databases include frequency, state/county, latitude/longitude, call-sign and  
licensee name. For further information on the Commission’s existing databases,  
you can contact Donald Campbell at [email protected] or 202-418-2405.  
Canlocalandstategovernmentalbodiesestablishlimitsfor  
RFexposure?  
Although some local and state governments have enacted rules and regulations  
about human exposure to RF energy in the past, the Telecommunications Act of  
1996 requires the Federal Government to control human exposure to RF  
emissions. In particular, Section 704 of the Act states that, “No State or local  
government or instrumentality thereof may regulate the placement,  
construction, and modification of personal wireless service facilities on the  
basis of the environmental effects of radio frequency emissions to the extent  
that such facilities comply with the Commission’s regulations concerning such  
emissions.” Further information on federal authority and FCC policy is available  
in a fact sheet from the FCC’s Wireless Telecommunications Bureau at  
www.fcc.gov/wtb.  
Dowirelessphonesposeahealthhazard?  
The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are  
associated with using wireless phones. There is no proof, however, that wireless  
phones are absolutely safe. Wireless phones emit low levels of radiofrequency  
energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. They also emit very low  
levels of RF when in the stand-by mode. Whereas high levels of RF can produce  
health effects (by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that does not  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects. Many studies  
of low level RF exposures have not found any biological effects. Some studies  
have suggested that some biological effects may occur, but such findings have  
not been confirmed by additional research. In some cases, other researchers  
have had difficulty in reproducing those studies, or in determining the reasons  
for inconsistent results.  
WhatisFDA’sroleconcerningthesafetyofwirelessphones?  
Under the law, FDA does not review the safety of radiation-emitting consumer  
products such as wireless phones before they can be sold, as it does with new  
drugs or medical devices. However, the agency has authority to take action if  
wireless phones are shown to emit radiofrequency energy (RF) at a level that is  
hazardous to the user. In such a case, FDA could require the manufacturers of  
wireless phones to notify users of the health hazard and to repair, replace or  
recall the phones so that the hazard no longer exists.  
Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory actions, FDA  
has urged the wireless phone industry to take a number of steps, including the  
following:  
Ⅲ
Support needed research into possible biological effects of RF of the  
type emitted by wireless phones;  
Ⅲ
Design wireless phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the  
user that is not necessary for device function; and  
Ⅲ
Cooperate in providing users of wireless phones with the best possible  
information on possible effects of wireless phone use on human health  
FDA belongs to an interagency working group of the federal agencies that have  
responsibility for different aspects of RF safety to ensure coordinated efforts at  
the federal level. The following agencies belong to this working group:  
Ⅲ
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health  
Ⅲ
Environmental Protection Agency  
Ⅲ
Federal Communications Commission  
Ⅲ
Occupational Safety and Health Administration  
Ⅲ
National Telecommunications and Information Administration  
The National Institutes of Health participates in some interagency working  
group activities, as well.  
FDA shares regulatory responsibilities for wireless phones with the Federal  
Communications Commission (FCC). All phones that are sold in the United  
States must comply with FCC safety guidelines that limit RF exposure. FCC relies  
on FDA and other health agencies for safety questions about wireless phones.  
FCC also regulates the base stations that the wireless phone networks rely upon.  
While these base stations operate at higher power than do the wireless phones  
themselves, the RF exposures that people get from these base stations are  
typically thousands of times lower than those they can get from wireless  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
268  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
phones. Base stations are thus not the primary subject of the safety questions  
discussed in this document.  
Whatkindsofphonesarethesubjectofthisupdate?  
The term “wireless phone” refers here to hand-held wireless phones with built-  
in antennas, often called “cell,” “mobile,” or “PCS” phones. These types of  
wireless phones can expose the user to measurable radiofrequency energy (RF)  
because of the short distance between the phone and the user’s head. These RF  
exposures are limited by Federal Communications Commission safety  
guidelines that were developed with the advice of FDA and other federal health  
and safety agencies. When the phone is located at greater distances from the  
user, the exposure to RF is drastically lower because a person’s RF exposure  
decreases rapidly with increasing distance from the source. The so-called  
“cordless phones,” which have a base unit connected to the telephone wiring in  
a house, typically operate at far lower power levels, and thus produce RF  
exposures well within the FCC’s compliance limits.  
Whataretheresultsoftheresearchdonealready?  
The research done thus far has produced conflicting results, and many studies  
have suffered from flaws in their research methods. Animal experiments  
investigating the effects of radiofrequency energy (RF) exposures characteristic  
of wireless phones have yielded conflicting results that often cannot be  
repeated in other laboratories. A few animal studies, however, have suggested  
that low levels of RF could accelerate the development of cancer in laboratory  
animals. However, many of the studies that showed increased tumor  
development used animals that had been genetically engineered or treated with  
cancer-causing chemicals so as to be pre-disposed to develop cancer in the  
absence of RF exposure. Other studies exposed the animals to RF for up to 22  
hours per day. These conditions are not similar to the conditions under which  
people use wireless phones, so we don’t know with certainty what the results of  
such studies mean for human health.  
Three large epidemiology studies have been published since December 2000.  
Between them, the studies investigated any possible association between the  
use of wireless phones and primary brain cancer, glioma, meningioma, or  
acoustic neuroma, tumors of the brain or salivary gland, leukemia, or other  
cancers. None of the studies demonstrated the existence of any harmful health  
effects from wireless phone RF exposures. However, none of the studies can  
answer questions about long-term exposures, since the average period of phone  
use in these studies was around three years.  
WhatresearchisneededtodecidewhetherRFexposurefromwireless  
phonesposesahealthrisk?  
A combination of laboratory studies and epidemiological studies of people  
actually using wireless phones would provide some of the data that are needed.  
Lifetime animal exposure studies could be completed in a few years. However,  
very large numbers of animals would be needed to provide reliable proof of a  
cancer promoting effect if one exists. Epidemiological studies can provide data  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
that is directly applicable to human populations, but 10 or more years’ follow-up  
may be needed to provide answers about some health effects, such as cancer.  
This is because the interval between the time of exposure to a cancer-causing  
agent and the time tumors develop - if they do - may be many, many years. The  
interpretation of epidemiological studies is hampered by difficulties in  
measuring actual RF exposure during day-to-day use of wireless phones. Many  
factors affect this measurement, such as the angle at which the phone is held, or  
which model of phone is used.  
WhatisFDAdoingtofindoutmoreaboutthepossiblehealtheffectsof  
wirelessphoneRF?  
FDA is working with the U.S. National Toxicology Program and with groups of  
investigators around the world to ensure that high priority animal studies are  
conducted to address important questions about the effects of exposure to  
radiofrequency energy (RF).  
FDA has been a leading participant in the World Health Organization  
International Electromagnetic Fields (EMF) Project since its inception in 1996.  
An influential result of this work has been the development of a detailed agenda  
of research needs that has driven the establishment of new research programs  
around the world. The Project has also helped develop a series of public  
information documents on EMF issues.  
FDA and the Cellular Telecommunications & Internet Association (CTIA) have a  
formal Cooperative Research and Development Agreement (CRADA) to do  
research on wireless phone safety. FDA provides the scientific oversight,  
obtaining input from experts in government, industry, and academic  
organizations. CTIA-funded research is conducted through contracts to  
independent investigators. The initial research will include both laboratory  
studies and studies of wireless phone users. The CRADA will also include a  
broad assessment of additional research needs in the context of the latest  
research developments around the world.  
WhatstepscanItaketoreducemyexposuretoradiofrequencyenergyfrom  
mywirelessphone?  
If there is a risk from these products--and at this point we do not know that there  
is--it is probably very small. But if you are concerned about avoiding even  
potential risks, you can take a few simple steps to minimize your exposure to  
radiofrequency energy (RF). Since time is a key factor in how much exposure a  
person receives, reducing the amount of time spent using a wireless phone will  
reduce RF exposure.  
Ⅲ
If you must conduct extended conversations by wireless phone every day,  
you could place more distance between your body and the source of the  
RF, since the exposure level drops off dramatically with distance. For  
example, you could use a headset and carry the wireless phone away from  
your body or use a wireless phone connected to a remote antenna.  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
270  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Again, the scientific data do not demonstrate that wireless phones are harmful.  
But if you are concerned about the RF exposure from these products, you can  
use measures like those described above to reduce your RF exposure from  
wireless phone use.  
Whataboutchildrenusingwirelessphones?  
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to users of wireless phones,  
including children and teenagers. If you want to take steps to lower exposure to  
radiofrequency energy (RF), the measures described above would apply to  
children and teenagers using wireless phones. Reducing the time of wireless  
phone use and increasing the distance between the user and the RF source will  
reduce RF exposure.  
Some groups sponsored by other national governments have advised that  
children be discouraged from using wireless phones at all. For example, the  
government in the United Kingdom distributed leaflets containing such a  
recommendation in December 2000. They noted that no evidence exists that  
using a wireless phone causes brain tumors or other ill effects. Their  
recommendation to limit wireless phone use by children was strictly  
precautionary; it was not based on scientific evidence that any health hazard  
exists.  
Whataboutwirelessphoneinterferencewithmedicalequipment?  
Radiofrequency energy (RF) from wireless phones can interact with some  
electronic devices. For this reason, FDA helped develop a detailed test method  
to measure electromagnetic interference (EMI) of implanted cardiac  
pacemakers and defibrillators from wireless telephones. This test method is  
now part of a standard sponsored by the Association for the Advancement of  
Medical instrumentation (AAMI). The final draft, a joint effort by FDA, medical  
device manufacturers, and many other groups, was completed in late 2000. This  
standard will allow manufacturers to ensure that cardiac pacemakers and  
defibrillators are safe from wireless phone EMI.  
FDA has tested hearing aids for interference from handheld wireless phones and  
helped develop a voluntary standard sponsored by the Institute of Electrical and  
Electronic Engineers (IEEE). This standard specifies test methods and  
performance requirements for hearing aids and wireless phones so that that no  
interference occurs when a person uses a “compatible” phone and a  
“compatible” hearing aid at the same time. This standard was approved by the  
IEEE in 2000.  
FDA continues to monitor the use of wireless phones for possible interactions  
with other medical devices. Should harmful interference be found to occur, FDA  
will conduct testing to assess the interference and work to resolve the problem.  
WhichotherfederalagencieshaveresponsibilitiesrelatedtopotentialRF  
healtheffects?  
Certain agencies in the Federal Government have been involved in monitoring,  
researching or regulating issues related to human exposure to RF radiation.  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
These agencies include the Food and Drug Administration (FDA), the  
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), the Occupational Safety and Health  
Administration (OSHA), the National Institute for Occupational Safety and  
Health (NIOSH), the National Telecommunications and Information  
Administration (NTIA) and the Department of Defense (DOD).  
By authority of the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968, the  
Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the FDA develops  
performance standards for the emission of radiation from electronic products  
including X-ray equipment, other medical devices, television sets, microwave  
ovens, laser products and sunlamps. The CDRH established a product  
performance standard for microwave ovens in 1971 limiting the amount of RF  
leakage from ovens. However, the CDRH has not adopted performance  
standards for other RF-emitting products. The FDA is, however, the lead federal  
health agency in monitoring the latest research developments and advising  
other agencies with respect to the safety of RF-emitting products used by the  
public, such as cellular and PCS phones.  
The FDA’s microwave oven standard is an emission standard (as opposed to an  
exposure standard) that allows specific levels of microwave leakage (measured  
at five centimeters from the oven surface). The standard also requires ovens to  
have two independent interlock systems that prevent the oven from generating  
microwaves the moment that the latch is released or the door of the oven is  
opened. The FDA has stated that ovens that meet its standards and are used  
according to the manufacturer’s recommendations are safe for consumer and  
industrial use. More information is available from: www.fda.gov/cdrh.  
The EPA has, in the past, considered developing federal guidelines for public  
exposure to RF radiation. However, EPA activities related to RF safety and health  
are presently limited to advisory functions. For example, the EPA now chairs an  
Inter-agency Radiofrequency Working Group, which coordinates RF health-  
related activities among the various federal agencies with health or regulatory  
responsibilities in this area.  
OSHA is responsible for protecting workers from exposure to hazardous  
chemical and physical agents. In 1971, OSHA issued a protection guide for  
exposure of workers to RF radiation [29 CFR 1910.97]. However, this guide was  
later ruled to be only advisory and not mandatory. Moreover, it was based on an  
earlier RF exposure standard that has now been revised. At the present time,  
OSHA uses the IEEE and/or FCC exposure guidelines for enforcement purposes  
under OSHA’s “general duty clause” (for more information see:http://www.osha-  
slc.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/index.html.  
NIOSH is part of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. It conducts  
research and investigations into issues related to occupational exposure to  
chemical and physical agents. NIOSH has, in the past, undertaken to develop RF  
exposure guidelines for workers, but final guidelines were never adopted by the  
agency. NIOSH conducts safety-related RF studies through its Physical Agents  
Effects Branch in Cincinnati,Ohio.  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
272  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The NTIA is an agency of the U.S. Department of Commerce and is responsible  
for authorizing Federal Government use of the RF electromagnetic spectrum.  
Like the FCC, the NTIA also has NEPA responsibilities and has considered  
adopting guidelines for evaluating RF exposure from U.S. Government  
transmitters such as radar and military facilities.  
The Department of Defense (DOD) has conducted research on the biological  
effects of RF energy for a number of years. This research is now conducted  
primarily at the U.S. Air Force Research Laboratory located at Brooks Air Force  
Base, Texas. The DOD Web site for RF biological effects information is listed  
with other sites in conjunction with a question on other sources of information,  
below.  
Whofundsandcarriesoutresearchonthebiologicaleffectsof  
RFenergy?  
Research into possible biological effects of RF energy is carried out in  
laboratories in the United States and around the world. In the U.S., most  
research has been funded by the Department of Defense, due to the extensive  
military use of RF equipment such as radar and high-powered radio transmitters.  
In addition, some federal agencies responsible for health and safety, such as the  
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and the U.S. Food and Drug  
Administration (FDA), have sponsored and conducted research in this area. At  
the present time, most of the non-military research on biological effects of RF  
energy in the U.S. is being funded by industry organizations. More research is  
being carried out overseas, particularly in Europe.  
In 1996, the World Health Organization (WHO) established the International  
EMF Project to review the scientific literature and work towards resolution of  
health concerns over the use of RF technology. WHO maintains a Web site that  
provides extensive information on this project and about RF biological effects  
and research (www.who.ch/peh-emf).  
FDA, EPA and other US government agencies responsible for public health and  
safety have worked together and in connection with WHO to monitor  
developments and identify research needs related to RF biological effects.  
HowdoesFCCAuditCellPhoneRF?  
After FCC grants permission for a particular cellular telephone to be marketed,  
FCC will occasionally conduct “post-grant” testing to determine whether  
production versions of the phone are being produced to conform with FCC  
regulatory requirements. The manufacturer of a cell phone that does not meet  
FCC’s regulatory requirements may be required to remove the cell phone from  
use and to refund the purchase price or provide a replacement phone, and may  
be subject to civil or criminal penalties. In addition, if the cell phone presents a  
risk of injury to the user, FDA may also take regulatory action. The most  
important post-grant test, from a consumer’s perspective, is testing of the RF  
emissions of the phone. FCC measures the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) of the  
phone, following a very rigorous testing protocol. As is true for nearly any  
scientific measurement, there is a possibility that the test measurement may be  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
less than or greater than the actual RF emitted by the phone. This difference  
between the RF test measurement and actual RF emission is because test  
measurements are limited by instrument accuracy, because test measurement  
and actual use environments are different, and other variable factors. This  
inherent variability is known as “measurement uncertainty.” When FCC  
conducts post-grant testing of a cell phone, FCC takes into account any  
measurement uncertainty to when determining whether regulatory action is  
appropriate. This approach ensures that when FCC takes regulatory action, it  
will have a sound, defensible scientific basis.  
FDA scientific staff reviewed the methodology used by FCC to measure cell  
phone RF, and agreed it is an acceptable approach, given our current  
understanding of the risks presented by cellular phone RF emissions. RF  
emissions from cellular phones have not been shown to present a risk of injury  
to the user when the measured SAR is less than the safety limits set by FCC (an  
SAR of 1.6 w/kg). Even in a case where the maximum measurement uncertainty  
permitted by current measurement standards was added to the maximum  
permissible SAR, the resulting SAR value would be well below any level known  
to produce an acute effect. Consequently, FCC’s approach with measurement  
uncertainty will not result in consumers being exposed to any known risk from  
the RF emitted by cellular telephones.  
FDA will continue to monitor studies and literature reports concerning acute  
effects of cell phone RF, and concerning chronic effects of long-term exposure  
to cellular telephone RF (that is, the risks from using a cell phone for many  
years). If new information leads FDA to believe that a change to FCC’s  
measurement policy may be appropriate, FDA will contact FCC and both  
agencies will work together to develop a mutually-acceptable approach.  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
274  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Owner’s Record  
The model number, regulatory number and serial number are located on a  
nameplate inside the battery compartment. Record the serial number in the space  
provided below. This will be helpful if you need to contact us about your phone in  
the future.  
Model: Sanyo SCP-7400  
Serial No.:  
User’s Guide Proprietary Notice  
CDMA Technology is licensed by QUALCOMM Incorporated under one or more of  
the following patents:  
4,901,307 5,109,390 5,267,262 5,416,797  
5,506,865 5,544,196 5,657,420 5,101,501  
5,267,261 5,414,796 5,504,773 5,535,239  
5,600,754 5,778,338 5,228,054 5,337,338  
5,710,784 5,056,109 5,568,483 5,659,569  
5,490,165 5,511,073  
T9 Text Input is licensed by Tegic Communications and is covered by U.S. Pat.  
5,818,437, U.S. Pat. 5,953,541, U.S. Pat. 6,011,554 and other patents pending.  
User’s Guide template version 3D (09-01-03)  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu 105  
Viewing 106  
Call Forwarding 216  
Call Guard 80  
Call History  
Erasing 90  
Making a Call 88  
Options 88  
Index  
A
Abbreviated Dialing 31, 60  
Advanced Information 111  
Airplane Mode 54  
Alarm Clock 111  
Alert Notification 43  
Answering Calls 22  
Any Key Answer 59  
Area Name 48  
Prepending 90  
Saving 89  
Viewing 87  
Call Waiting 214  
Callback Number 65  
Caller ID 214  
Calling in Lock Mode 70  
Chat 237  
Contacts  
Adding 92, 95  
Dialing 30  
Editing 95, 97  
Erasing 73  
Finding 29, 93, 125  
Options 94  
Saving 28  
Secret 99  
Auto Answer 57  
Auto Delete 166  
Automatic Speech Recognition  
Activating 123  
Available Commands 123  
Digit Training 129  
Finding Contacts 125  
Help 130  
Making a Call 124  
Making a Ready Link Call 128  
Phone Status 130  
Voice Tag 126  
B
Background 51  
Backlight Time Length 46  
Battery  
D
Dialing  
Abbreviated 31, 60  
Contacts 30, 124  
Numbers With Pauses 29  
Options 21  
Speed Dialing 31, 96, 154  
Digit Training 129  
Display Settings  
Area Name 48  
Background 51  
Backlight Time Length 46  
Display Screen 47  
Font Size 52  
Capacity 17  
Charging 18  
Disposal 257  
Installing 17  
Removing 17  
Standby Time 17  
Talk Time 17  
C
Calculator 113  
Calendar 101  
Call Alarm  
Adding 104  
Alerts 105  
Editing 106  
Erasing 106, 109  
Greeting 45  
Incoming Calls 47  
Main Menu 50  
My Buddy 51  
Index  
276  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Screen Saver 50  
Standby Mode 49  
Downloading  
Accessing Menus 238  
Assigning 119  
In Camera Folder 168  
In-Call Options 27  
Input Mode  
Alphabet Mode 34  
Emoticons 36  
Confirming 117  
Data Size 120  
Erasing 73, 121  
Files 114  
Numbers 35  
Preset Suffixes 35  
Smileys 36  
Symbols 35  
Icon Indication 118  
Settings 118  
T9 Text Mode 33  
Instant Messaging 236  
Sorting 119  
Viewing Memory 120  
K
Key Press Echo 41  
E
L
Emergency Calling 26  
Emoticons 36  
End-of-Call Options 28  
Event  
Language 66  
Limit Use 71  
Location Settings 53  
Lock Code 70  
Locking  
Adding 102  
Alerts 103  
Editing 106  
Erasing 106, 109  
Menu 103  
Viewing 106  
Phone 68  
Picture and Video 69  
Ready Link Calls 70  
Voice Calls 69  
M
F
Making Calls 20  
Making Ready Link Call 141, 142,  
143  
Meeting Mode 61  
Menu Diagram 83  
Message Notification 64  
Messaging  
Displaying 226  
Folder  
Creating 233  
Drafts 228  
Editing 233  
Erasing 234, 235  
Outbox 229  
Font Size 232  
Moving a Message 234  
Options 229  
Faceplate 15  
FCC Notice 258  
Features 14  
Font Size 52, 232  
G
Games  
Downloading 240  
Playing 241  
Greeting 45  
H
Hard Pause 29  
Headset Mode 62  
Help 6  
I
Icon Indication 12, 118, 167, 177  
In Camcorder Folder 178  
Prepending 232  
Index  
277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending 227, 228, 229  
Sprint PCS Picture Mail 226  
Storage 226  
Mini-Flashlight 66  
Missed Call Notification 26, 144  
Multimedia Player  
FAQs 202  
Options 197, 201  
Playing 199, 224  
Purchasing 223  
Storing 168  
Taking 159  
Uploading 190  
Zoom 164  
Plus Code 30  
Power-off Tone 40  
Premium Services Content 238  
Prepend Dialing 90, 232  
Preset Messages 64  
Preset Suffixes 35  
Muting 25  
My Buddy 51  
Q
Quiet Ringer 23  
Qwest Services  
Call Forwarding 216  
Call Waiting 214  
Caller ID 214  
N
Net Guard 220  
O
Online Sprint PCS Picture Mail  
Auto Delete 166  
Downloading 191  
Managing 189  
R
Ready Link  
Adding 148, 149  
Alert 139, 156  
Contacts List 140  
Copying 146  
Options 193  
Sending 192  
Uploading 190  
Open/Close Flip Option 58  
Default View 157  
Editing 150  
Erasing 152  
P
Phone Number  
Dialing with Pauses 29  
Displaying 19  
Finding 29  
Saving 28  
Phone Status 130  
Pictures  
Auto Delete 166  
Downloading 191  
Flash 162  
Icon Indication 167  
Multiple Shots 163  
Options 161, 168, 172, 179, 182  
Self-timer 162  
Sending 183  
Finding 147  
Floor Display 157  
Floor Tone 39  
Making Calls  
by Entering Number 143  
by Using ASR 128  
Contact 141  
Group 142  
Options 146  
Preparing 138  
Ready Link Guard 155  
Receiving 145  
Restarting 154  
Ringer Types 155  
Saving 147  
Settings 165  
Shutter Sound 165  
Status Area 166  
Setting 138  
Speakerphone 156  
Index  
278  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Speed Dialing 154  
Updating 153  
Resetting  
Resetting 74  
Unlocking Phone 3, 69  
Shortcut 56  
Phone 74  
Side Key Guard 59  
Signature 65  
Silence All 44  
Picture Account 74  
Return to Idle 63  
Ringer  
Assigning 243  
Downloading 242  
Purchasing 243  
Tone Length 40  
Types 38  
Volume 25, 41  
Roaming  
Analog Networks 78  
Digital Networks 77  
Setting 79  
Sleep Mode 63  
Sound Settings  
Silence All 44  
Start-up/Power-off Tone 40  
Volume Settings 25, 41  
Speakerphone 24  
Special Numbers 72  
Speed Dialing 31, 96, 154  
Sprint PCS Picture Mail  
Password 160  
Sprint PCS Vision  
Chat 237  
Downloading 238  
Enabling and Disabling 75  
FAQs 251  
Games 240  
Launching 219  
Ringers 242  
Screen Savers 244  
Web 246  
Standby Time 17  
Start-up Tone 40  
Symbols 35  
S
Safety Guidelines 252  
Saved to Phone Folder 171, 181  
Scheduler  
Calendar 101  
Call Alarm 104  
Erasing 108, 109  
Event 102  
Memory 109  
Setting Holidays 101  
To Do 107  
Screen Call  
Activating 134  
Erasing 136  
Recording 135, 136  
Reviewing 136  
Selecting Announcement 135  
Screen Savers  
Assigning 245  
Downloading 244  
Purchasing 245  
Secret Mode 99  
Security Menu  
Accessing 68  
T
T9 Text Input 33  
Talk Time 17  
Three-Way Call 215  
To Do Items  
Adding 107, 108  
Deleting 108, 109  
Editing 107  
Viewing 107  
Tone Length 40  
TTY 55  
Turning On and Off 16  
2-Second Pause 29  
Changing the Lock Code 70  
Locking 68  
Index  
279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U
Muting 25  
Ringer 25  
Unlocking Phone 3, 69  
Unmute 25  
User Address 110  
User Name 218  
W
Web  
Launching 219  
Navigating 221  
Net Guard 220  
V
Version 110  
Videos  
World Clock 49, 113  
Auto Delete 166  
Cue Sound 176  
Downloading 191  
Icon Indication 177  
Options 174  
Self-timer 162  
Sending 185  
Settings 176  
Storing 178  
Taking 173  
Uploading 190  
Zoom 175  
Voice Memo  
Erasing 133  
Recording 131  
Reviewing 132  
Voice Prompt 40  
Voice Tags  
Erasing 73, 127  
Finding 94  
Making a Call 126  
Programming 126  
Reviewing 127  
Voicemail  
Button Guide 209  
Clearing Message Icon 212  
Details 212  
Menu Key 213  
Message Alerts 208  
Notification 207  
Options 210  
Retrieving 208  
Setting Up 4, 207  
Volume Settings  
During a Conversation 25  
Index  
280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Quadra Fire Welding Consumables QV32B A User Guide
RCA Conference Phone RP 9115A User Guide
RCA CRT Television F27648 User Guide
Regency Indoor Fireplace I2400M User Guide
Ricoh All in One Printer 1075 User Guide
Ryobi Work Light FL1800 User Guide
Samsung Blu ray Player AK68 01942G 00 User Guide
Samsung MP3 Player YP 53 User Guide
Samsung Refrigerator SR 38NMA User Guide
SBC comm Modem 5260MC02A User Guide